<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?><rss version="2.0"
	xmlns:content="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/content/"
	xmlns:wfw="http://wellformedweb.org/CommentAPI/"
	xmlns:dc="http://purl.org/dc/elements/1.1/"
	xmlns:atom="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom"
	xmlns:sy="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/syndication/"
	xmlns:slash="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/slash/"
	>

<channel>
	<title>Class 12 Physics Archives - CBSE School Notes</title>
	<atom:link href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/category/class-12-physics/feed/" rel="self" type="application/rss+xml" />
	<link>https://cbseschoolnotes.com/category/class-12-physics/</link>
	<description>CBSE Notes For Class 6,7,8,9,10</description>
	<lastBuildDate>Thu, 07 Nov 2024 08:37:20 +0000</lastBuildDate>
	<language>en-US</language>
	<sy:updatePeriod>
	hourly	</sy:updatePeriod>
	<sy:updateFrequency>
	1	</sy:updateFrequency>
	<generator>https://wordpress.org/?v=6.9.4</generator>

<image>
	<url>https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/cropped-CBSE-Notes-For-Class-678910-1-32x32.png</url>
	<title>Class 12 Physics Archives - CBSE School Notes</title>
	<link>https://cbseschoolnotes.com/category/class-12-physics/</link>
	<width>32</width>
	<height>32</height>
</image> 
	<item>
		<title>Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 11 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter</title>
		<link>https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics-chapter-11/</link>
					<comments>https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics-chapter-11/#respond</comments>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[Kristensmith Taylor]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Wed, 22 May 2024 05:19:38 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[Class 12 Physics]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://cbseschoolnotes.com/?p=4988</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[<p>CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 11  Dual Nature Of Radiation And Matter Multiple Choice Questions And Answers Question 1. The speed acquired by a free electron when accelerated from rest through a potential difference of 100V is: 6 x 106 m s-1 3 x 106 m s-1 4 x 105 m s-1 2 x 103 ... <a title="Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 11 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter" class="read-more" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics-chapter-11/" aria-label="More on Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 11 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter">Read more</a></p>
<p>The post <a rel="nofollow" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics-chapter-11/">Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 11 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter</a> appeared first on <a rel="nofollow" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com">CBSE School Notes</a>.</p>
]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<h2>CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 11  Dual Nature Of Radiation And Matter Multiple Choice Questions And Answers</h2>
<p><img fetchpriority="high" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-6862" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Important-Questions-for-CBSE-Class-12-Physics-Chapter-11-Dual-Nature-of-Radiation-and-Matter.png" alt="Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 11 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter" width="739" height="539" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Important-Questions-for-CBSE-Class-12-Physics-Chapter-11-Dual-Nature-of-Radiation-and-Matter.png 739w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Important-Questions-for-CBSE-Class-12-Physics-Chapter-11-Dual-Nature-of-Radiation-and-Matter-300x219.png 300w" sizes="(max-width: 739px) 100vw, 739px" /></p>
<p><strong>Question 1. The speed acquired by a free electron when accelerated from rest through a potential difference of 100V is:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>6 x 10<sup>6</sup> m s<sup>-1</sup></li>
<li>3 x 10<sup>6</sup> m s<sup>-1</sup></li>
<li>4 x 10<sup>5</sup> m s<sup>-1</sup></li>
<li>2 x 10<sup>3</sup> m s<sup>-1</sup></li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. 6 x 10<sup>6</sup> m s<sup>-1</sup></p>
<p><strong>Read and Learn More<a href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics/"> Important Questions for Class 12 Physics with Answers</a></strong></p>
<p><strong>Question 2. Photons of energy 1 eV and 2.5 eV successively illuminate a metal whose work function is ________.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>1:2</li>
<li>2:1</li>
<li>3:1</li>
<li>1:3</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. 1:2</p>
<p>K.E<sub>max</sub> for 1 photon = 1-0.5 = 0.5eV</p>
<p>K.E<sub>max</sub> for 2 photon = 2.5-0.5 = 2eV</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{K E_1}{K E_2}=\frac{0.5}{2}=\frac{1}{4} \quad\left(K=\frac{1}{2} m v^2\right)\)</p>
<p>So speed \(\left(\frac{v_1}{v_2}=\frac{1}{2}\right)\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 3. The de-Broglie wavelength associated with a particle with rest mass m<sub>0</sub> and moving with the speed of light in vacuum is ________.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>\(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{m}_0 \mathrm{c}}\)</li>
<li>0</li>
<li>∞</li>
<li>\(\frac{\mathrm{m}_0 \mathrm{c}}{\mathrm{h}}\)</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 2. 0</p>
<p><strong>Question 4. Photoelectric effect represents __________</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Electron has a wave nature</li>
<li>Light has a particle nature</li>
<li>Light has a wave nature</li>
<li>None of these</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 2. Light has a particle nature</p>
<p><strong>Question 5. If the momentum of an electron is required to be the same as that of a wave having 5200 Å wavelength, its velocity should be ______ ms<sup>-1</sup></strong></p>
<ol>
<li>10<sup>3</sup></li>
<li>1.4 x 10<sup>3</sup></li>
<li>1.39 x 10<sup>3</sup></li>
<li>2.8 x 10<sup>3</sup></li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. 1.39 x 10<sup>3</sup></p>
<p>⇒ \(\lambda=\frac{h}{m v}\)</p>
<p>∴ \(v=\frac{h}{m \lambda}=\frac{6.62 \times 10^{-34}}{9.1 \times 10^{-31} \times 5200 \times 10^{-10}}=1.39 \times 10^3 \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 6. To increase the de Broglie wavelength of an electron from 0.5 x 10<sup>-10</sup> m to 10<sup>-10</sup> m, its energy should be _________.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Increased to four times</li>
<li>Halved</li>
<li>Doubled</li>
<li>Decreased to the fourth part</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. Decreased to fourth part</p>
<p>⇒ \(\lambda=\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\sqrt{2 \mathrm{mK}}}\) ⇒ \(\lambda \propto \frac{1}{\sqrt{\mathrm{K}}}\)</p>
<p>∴ \(K \propto \frac{1}{\lambda^2}\)</p>
<p>λ → twice, K must be \(\left(\frac{1}{4}\right)^{th}\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 7. The energy of the photon is E = hf and its momentum is \(P=\frac{h}{\lambda}\), where λ, is the wavelength of the photon with this assumption speed of the light wave is</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>\(\frac{P}{E}\)</li>
<li>\(\frac{E}{P}\)</li>
<li>EP</li>
<li>\(\left(\frac{E}{P}\right)^2\)</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 2. \(\frac{E}{P}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(E=h f=\frac{h c}{\lambda}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(c=\frac{E \lambda}{h} \quad\left(\frac{\lambda}{h}=\frac{1}{P}\right)\)</p>
<p>∴ \(c=\frac{E}{P}\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 8. Which of the following physical quantities has the dimension of Planck constant (h)?</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Angular momentum</li>
<li>Force</li>
<li>Energy</li>
<li>Power</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. Angular momentum</p>
<p><strong>Question 9. If the photoelectric effect is not seen with the ultraviolet radiations in a given metal, photoelectrons may be emitted with the _________.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Radio waves</li>
<li>Infrared waves</li>
<li>X-rays</li>
<li>Visible light</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. X-rays</p>
<p><strong>Question 10. The work function of _______ is the lowest.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Platinum</li>
<li>Caesium</li>
<li>nickel</li>
<li>Copper</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 2. Caesium</p>
<p><strong>Question 11. The value of slopping potential depends on ________ of incident light.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Intensity</li>
<li>Frequency</li>
<li>Momentum</li>
<li>Velocity</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 2. Frequency</p>
<p><strong>Question 12. Monochromatic light of frequency 6 x 10<sup>14</sup> Hz is produced by laser. Each photon has an energy = ________ J.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>6 x 10<sup>14</sup></li>
<li>4 x 10<sup>-19</sup></li>
<li>4 x 10<sup>-20</sup></li>
<li>6 x 10<sup>-14</sup></li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 2. 4 x 10<sup>-19</sup></p>
<p>E = hv</p>
<p>E = 6.62 x 10<sup>-34</sup> x 6 x 10<sup>14</sup> = 39.72 x 10<sup>-20</sup> = 3.972 x 10<sup>-19</sup> = 4 x 10<sup>-19</sup> J</p>
<p><strong>Question 13. For a given frequency of incident radiation, slopping potential ________.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Does not depend on the intensity</li>
<li>Is inversely proportional to the intensity</li>
<li>Is directly proportional to the intensity</li>
<li>Is inversely proportional to the square of intensity.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. Does do not depend on the intensity</p>
<p><strong>Question 14. The slope of a graph of stopping potential versus frequency of incident radiation is _________.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>c</li>
<li>h</li>
<li>\(\frac{h}{e}\)</li>
<li>\(\frac{e}{h}\)</li>
</ol>
<p>(where h = Planck&#8217;s constant and e = charge of an electron)</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. \(\frac{h}{e}\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 15. De-Broglie wavelength of a bullet of mass 0.040 kg travelling at the speed of 1 km/s is _________ m.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>1.7 x 10<sup>-35</sup></li>
<li>4.04 x 10<sup>-24</sup></li>
<li>1. 1 x 10<sup>-32</sup></li>
<li>3 x 10<sup>-32</sup></li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. 1.7 x 10<sup>-35</sup></p>
<p>∴ \(\lambda=\frac{h}{m v}=\frac{6.62 \times 10^{34}}{0.040 \times 1000}=1.655 \times 10^{-35}=1.7 \times 10^{-35} \mathrm{~m}\)</p>
<h2>CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 11  Dual Nature Of Radiation And Matter Assertion And Reason</h2>
<p>For question numbers 1 to 6 two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct answer to these questions from the codes (1), and (2). (3) and (4) as given below.</p>
<ol>
<li>Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A</li>
<li>Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A</li>
<li>A is true but R is false</li>
<li>A is false and R is also false</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Question 1. Assertion:</strong> The photoelectric effect demonstrates the wave nature of light.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> The number of photoelectrons is proportional to the frequency of light</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A</p>
<p><strong>Question 2. Assertion:</strong> At saturation, the photoelectric current is maximum.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> At saturation, all the electrons emitted from the cathode can reach the anode.</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A</p>
<p><strong>Question 3. Assertion:</strong> A photon is not a material particle. It is a quantum of energy.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> The photoelectric effect demonstrates the wave nature of radiation.</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. A is true but R is false</p>
<p><strong>Question 4. Assertion:</strong> Photo electric current increases if the distance between the cathode and anode is increased.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> The momentum of a photon is directly proportional to its wavelength.</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. A is false and R is also false</p>
<p><strong>Question 5. Assertion:</strong> The photosensitivity of a metal is high if its work function is small.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> Work function = hv<sub>0</sub>, where v<sub>0</sub> is the threshold frequency.</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 2. Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A</p>
<p><strong>Question 6. Assertion:</strong> In his study of photoelectric emission, Hallwachs connected a negatively charged zinc plate to an electroscope. He found that negatively charged particles were emitted from the zinc plate under the action of visible light.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> An uncharged zinc plate becomes positively charged when it is irradiated by visible light.</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. A is false and R is also false</p>
<h2>CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 11  Dual Nature Of Radiation And Matter Short Questions And Answers</h2>
<p><strong>Question 1. A proton and a particle are accelerated through the same potential difference. Which one of the two has</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Greater de-Broglie wavelength, and</li>
<li>Less kinetic energy? Justify your answer</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>∴ \(\lambda=\frac{h}{p}=\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 q V m}}\)</p>
<p>1. α &#8211; particle: \(\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 q_{\alpha} V_{m_{\alpha}}}}=\lambda_\alpha\) ( ∵ \(\begin{aligned} &amp; \mathrm{q}_\alpha=2 \mathrm{q}_{\mathrm{p}}  &amp; \mathrm{m}_{\mathrm{\alpha}}=4 \mathrm{~m}_{\mathrm{p}} \end{aligned}\))</p>
<p>proton: \(\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 q_p V m_p}}=\lambda_p\)</p>
<p>Clearly, \(\lambda_{\mathrm{p}}&gt;\lambda_\alpha \text { as } \mathrm{m}_\alpha&gt;\mathrm{m}_{\mathrm{p}} \ and \mathrm{q}_\alpha&gt;\mathrm{q}_{\mathrm{p}}\)</p>
<p>So, a proton has a greater de-broglie wavelength.</p>
<p>2. As \(\frac{1}{2} m v^2=q_V ;(\text { K.E. })_{\mathrm{p}}&lt;(\text { K.E. })_{\alpha} \text { as } \mathrm{q}_{\mathrm{p}}&lt;\mathrm{q}_{\alpha}\)</p>
<p>So, a proton has less K.E</p>
<p><strong>Question 2.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Draw graphs showing the variation of photoelectric current with applied voltage for two incident radiations of equal frequency and different intensities. Mark the graph for the radiation of higher intensity.</li>
<li>Name the phenomenon which shows the quantum nature of electromagnetic radiation.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p><img decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4994" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Dual-Nature-Of-Radiation-And-Matter-Variation-Of-Photoelectric-Current.png" alt="Dual Nature Of Radiation And Matter Variation Of Photoelectric Current" width="533" height="329" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Dual-Nature-Of-Radiation-And-Matter-Variation-Of-Photoelectric-Current.png 533w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Dual-Nature-Of-Radiation-And-Matter-Variation-Of-Photoelectric-Current-300x185.png 300w" sizes="(max-width: 533px) 100vw, 533px" /></p>
<p>The graph I<sub>2</sub> corresponds to radiation of higher intensity</p>
<p>2. Photoelectric effect (PEE)</p>
<p><strong>Question 3. Plot a graph showing the variation of de-Broglie versus \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{V}}\) where V is accelerating the potential for two particles A and B carrying the same charge but of masses m<sub>1</sub>, m<sub>2</sub>, (m<sub>1</sub> &gt; m<sub>2</sub>). Which one of the two represents a particle of smaller mass and why?</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>As, \({\lambda} =\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 \mathrm{mqV}}}\)</p>
<p><strong>Graph:</strong> Slope of verses \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{V}}\) graph will be inversely prop, to the square root of the mass of the particles. Now, the slope of B is greater and it shows that its mass is smaller.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4995" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Dual-Nature-Of-Radiation-And-Matter-Variation-Of-De-Broglie-Wavelength.png" alt="Dual Nature Of Radiation And Matter Variation Of De-Broglie Wavelength" width="295" height="361" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Dual-Nature-Of-Radiation-And-Matter-Variation-Of-De-Broglie-Wavelength.png 295w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Dual-Nature-Of-Radiation-And-Matter-Variation-Of-De-Broglie-Wavelength-245x300.png 245w" sizes="(max-width: 295px) 100vw, 295px" /></p>
<p><strong>Question 4. The wavelength λ of a photon and the de-Broglie wavelength of an electron have the same value. Show that the energy of a photon is (2λmc/h) limes the kinetic energy of electron: where m. c and h have their usual meaning.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>⇒ \(E_{\text {photon }}=\frac{h c}{\lambda}\) → (1) \(\lambda_{\text {photon }}=\lambda_{\text {electron }}={\lambda}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(E_{\text {elcetron }}=\frac{h^2}{2 m \lambda^2}\) → (2) ( ∵ \(\lambda=\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\sqrt{2 \mathrm{mE}_{\text {electron }}}}\)))</p>
<p>Dividind (1) by (2), \(\frac{\mathrm{E}_{\text {photon }}}{\mathrm{E}_{\text {electron }}}=\frac{2 \mathrm{mc \lambda}}{\mathrm{h}}\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 5. Calculate the dc-Broglic wavelength of the electron orbiting in the n = 2 stale of hydrogen atom.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>The velocity of an e<sup>&#8211;</sup> in the first orbit (n = 1) of the hydrogen atom, v = 2.18 x 10<sup>6</sup> m/s.</p>
<p>Now, the velocity of e<sup>&#8211;</sup> in the second orbit (n = 2) of the hydrogen atom will be given as, v&#8217; = v/n</p>
<p>∴ v&#8217; = 1.09 x 10<sup>6</sup> m/s</p>
<p>So mv&#8217; = 9.9 x 10<sup>-25</sup></p>
<p>Putting the values in \(\lambda=\mathrm{h} / \mathrm{mv}^{\prime}=\frac{6.6 \times 10^{-34}}{9.9 \times 10^{-25}}=6.68 Å\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 6.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Define the intensity of radiation based on a photon picture of light. Write its S.I. unit.</li>
<li>Draw a plot showing the variation of the de-Broglie wavelength of an electron as a function of its K.E.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>The intensity of radiation is defined as the energy associated with several photons incident/could from a unit surface area in unit time.</p>
<p>i.e. \(\text { Intensity }=\frac{\text { Energy }}{\text { Area } \times \operatorname{time}}\)</p>
<p><strong>SI unit:</strong></p>
<p>∴ \(\frac{\text { joule }}{m^2-s} \text { or } \mathrm{W}-\mathrm{m}^{-2}\)</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4996" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Dual-Nature-Of-Radiation-And-Matter-A-Plot.png" alt="Dual Nature Of Radiation And Matter A Plot" width="376" height="299" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Dual-Nature-Of-Radiation-And-Matter-A-Plot.png 376w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Dual-Nature-Of-Radiation-And-Matter-A-Plot-300x239.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 376px) 100vw, 376px" /></p>
<p>∵ \(\lambda=\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\sqrt{2 \mathrm{mE}}}\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 7.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Name the factor on which photoelectric emission from a surface depends.</li>
<li>Define the term ’threshold frequency&#8217; for a photosensitive material.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Metal should be photo-sensitive.</li>
<li>For a given photosensitive material, threshold frequency is the minimum frequency of radiation that is required for photoelectric emission from the material.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Question 8.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Plot a graph showing the variation of photocurrent v/s collector potential for three different intensities I<sub>1</sub> &lt; I<sub>2</sub> &lt; I<sub>3</sub>, two of which (I<sub>1</sub> and I<sub>2</sub>) have the same frequency v and the third has frequency v<sub>1</sub> &gt; v<sub>2</sub>.</li>
<li>Explain the nature of the curves based on Einstein&#8217;s equation.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4997" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Dual-Nature-Of-Radiation-And-Matter-Variation-Of-Photo-Current.png" alt="Dual Nature Of Radiation And Matter Variation Of Photo Current" width="398" height="406" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Dual-Nature-Of-Radiation-And-Matter-Variation-Of-Photo-Current.png 398w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Dual-Nature-Of-Radiation-And-Matter-Variation-Of-Photo-Current-294x300.png 294w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 398px) 100vw, 398px" /></p>
<p>2. From. eV<sub>0</sub> = hv- hv<sub>0</sub> [Clearly stopping potential (V<sub>0</sub>) depends on incident freq.(v)]</p>
<p>or \(V_0=\frac{h}{e} v-\frac{h}{e} v_0\)</p>
<p>So. for I<sub>1</sub> and I<sub>2</sub> intensities, freq. (v) is the same, hence for them stopping potential (V<sub>0</sub>) is also equal.</p>
<p>Further, for. intensity having freq (v<sub>1</sub>) stopping potential is more. (∵ V<sub>1</sub> &gt; V<sub>2</sub> )</p>
<p><strong>Question 9. For the light of wavelength 400 nm incident on the cathode of a photocell, the stopping potential is 6V. If the wavelength of incident light is increased to 600 nm. calculate the new stopping potential. (Take h =4.14 x 10<sup>-15</sup> eV. s)</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p><strong>Given:</strong> \(\mathrm{hc}=4.14 \times 10^{-15} \times 3 \times 10^8 \mathrm{eV}s . \frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{s}}=12.42 \times 10^{-7} \mathrm{eVm}=12420 \mathrm{eVA}\)</p>
<p>λ<sub>1</sub>= 400 nm, λ<sub>2</sub>= 600 nm</p>
<p>V<sub>01</sub> =6V, V<sub>02 </sub>= ?</p>
<p>∵ E = W<sub>0</sub> + K.E<sub>max</sub></p>
<p>K.E<sub>max</sub> = E &#8211; W<sub>0</sub></p>
<p>⇒ \(\mathrm{eV}_0=\frac{h \mathrm{c}}{\lambda}-\mathrm{W}_0\) → (1)</p>
<p>So, \(\mathrm{eV}_{01}=\frac{h c}{\lambda_{1}}-W_0\) → (2)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\mathrm{eV}_{02}=\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\lambda_2}-\mathrm{W}_0\) → (3)</p>
<p>Equation (3) &#8211; (2)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\left(\mathrm{V}_{02}-\mathrm{V}_{01}\right) \mathrm{e}=\mathrm{hc}\left(\frac{\mathrm{I}}{\lambda_2}-\frac{1}{\lambda_1}\right) \Rightarrow\left(\mathrm{V}_{02}-6\right)=\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\mathrm{e}}\left(\frac{1}{600}-\frac{1}{400}\right)\)</p>
<p>∴ \(V_{02}-6=\frac{12420Å \mathrm{eV}}{\mathrm{e}}\left(-\frac{1}{12000}\right) \frac{1}Å; \quad V_{02}=\frac{-12420}{12000}+6=4.965 \mathrm{~V} \simeq 5 \mathrm{~V}\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 10. Write three characteristic features in the photoelectric effect which cannot be explained based on the wave theory of light, but can be explained only using Einstein’s equation.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>The instantaneous ejection of photoelectrons.</li>
<li>Existence of threshold freq. for a metal surface.</li>
<li>The fact that the K.E. of the emitted electrons is independent of the intensity of the light depends on its frequency.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Question 11. Plot a graph showing the variation of photoelectric current with intensity of light. The work function for the following metals is given:</strong></p>
<p><strong>Na: 2.75 eV and Mo: 4.17 eV </strong></p>
<p><strong>Which of these will not give photoelectron emission from a radiation of wavelength 3300 Å from a laser beam? What happens if the source of the laser beam is brought closer?</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4998" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Dual-Nature-Of-Radiation-And-Matter-Variation-Of-Photo-Current-With-Intensity-Of-Light.png" alt="Dual Nature Of Radiation And Matter Variation Of Photo Current With Intensity Of Light" width="391" height="298" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Dual-Nature-Of-Radiation-And-Matter-Variation-Of-Photo-Current-With-Intensity-Of-Light.png 391w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Dual-Nature-Of-Radiation-And-Matter-Variation-Of-Photo-Current-With-Intensity-Of-Light-300x229.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 391px) 100vw, 391px" /></p>
<p>For, \(\lambda=3300Å . E=\frac{h c}{\lambda}=\frac{6.6 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^8}{3300 \times 10^{-10}}=6 \times 10^{-19} \mathrm{~J}=\frac{6 \times 10^{-19}}{1.6 \times 10^{-19}} \mathrm{eV}=3.75 \mathrm{eV}\)</p>
<p>Incident energy 3.75 eV &lt;4.17 eV, so the photoelectric effect will not take place in Mo (4. 17 eV). Photocurrent will increase in Na if the source of the laser beam is brought closer.</p>
<p><strong>Question 11. State two important properties of photons which are used to write Einstein’s photoelectric equation. Define</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Stopping potential and</li>
<li>Threshold frequency, using Einstein’s equation and drawing necessary plots between relevant quantities.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>The energy of a photon is proportional to the freq. of light. (E = hv)</li>
<li>Photons are quanta or discrete carriers of energy.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Stopping potential:</strong> In the experiment of the photoelectric effect, the value of the negative potential of the anode at which photoelectric current reduces to zero is called slopping potential for the given freq. of incident radiation.</p>
<p><strong>Threshold freq.:</strong> For a given material, there exists a certain min. frequency below which no photoelectron can come out from the metal surface. This is called threshold frequency.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4999" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Dual-Nature-Of-Radiation-And-Matter-Threshold-Frequency.png" alt="Dual Nature Of Radiation And Matter Threshold Frequency" width="356" height="374" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Dual-Nature-Of-Radiation-And-Matter-Threshold-Frequency.png 356w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Dual-Nature-Of-Radiation-And-Matter-Threshold-Frequency-286x300.png 286w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 356px) 100vw, 356px" /></p>
<p><strong>Question 12. Sketch the graphs showing the variation of stopping potential with the frequency of incident radiations for two photosensitive materials A and B having threshold frequencies v<sub>A</sub> &gt; v<sub>B</sub>.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>In which case is the slopping potential more and why?</li>
<li>Does the slope of the graph depend on the nature of the material used? Explain.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5000" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Dual-Nature-Of-Radiation-And-Matter-Variation-Of-Stoping-Potential.png" alt="Dual Nature Of Radiation And Matter Variation Of Stoping Potential" width="388" height="410" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Dual-Nature-Of-Radiation-And-Matter-Variation-Of-Stoping-Potential.png 388w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Dual-Nature-Of-Radiation-And-Matter-Variation-Of-Stoping-Potential-284x300.png 284w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 388px) 100vw, 388px" /></p>
<p>From eV<sub>0</sub> = K<sub>max</sub> = hv &#8211; Φ</p>
<p>eV<sub>0</sub> = hv- hv<sub>0</sub></p>
<p>∴ \(V_0=\frac{h v}{e}-\frac{h v_0}{e}\)</p>
<p>1. From the above equation, we can conclude, that the more threshold freq., the less would be the slopping potential (V<sub>0</sub>). Here, v<sub>0A</sub> &gt; v<sub>0B</sub>, hence slopping potential (V<sub>0</sub>) is greater for B than A.</p>
<p>2. \(V_0=\left(\frac{h}{c}\right) v-\frac{h}{c} v_0(y=m x \pm c)\)</p>
<p>The slope of the above equation is \(\left(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{c}}\right)\) which is ‘independent’ of the nature of the material.</p>
<p><strong>Question 13. Using a photon picture of light, show how Einstein&#8217;s photoelectric equation can be established. Write two features of the photoelectric effect which cannot be explained by wave theory.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>Einstein states that electromagnetic radiation energy is built up of discrete units called quanta of energy and has energy hv where &#8216;h&#8217; is Planck&#8217;s constant and &#8216;V&#8217; is the frequency of light.</p>
<p>In this phenomenon, an e<sup>&#8211;</sup> absorbs a quantum of energy (hv), if the energy absorbed exceeds the minimum energy needed to escape from metal (Φ<sub>0</sub> ), e<sup>&#8211;</sup> is emitted with maximum K.E.</p>
<p>∴ \(\mathrm{K}_{\text {max }}=h v-\phi_0\) [Einstein&#8217;s photo electric equation]</p>
<p>Two features of PEE which can&#8217;t be explained by wave theory</p>
<ol>
<li>A min. frequency (threshold frequency) exists for diff. metals below which PEE is not possible.</li>
<li>PEE is an instantaneous phenomenon.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Question 14. Define the term ‘cut-off frequency” in photoelectric emission. The threshold frequency of a metal is f. When the light of frequency 2f is incident on the metal plate, the maximum velocity of photo-electrons is V<sub>1</sub>. When the frequency of the incident radiation is increased to 5f, the maximum velocity of photo-electrons is v<sub>2</sub>. Find the ratio: v<sub>1</sub>: v<sub>2</sub>.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p><strong>Cut-off Frequency:</strong> The minimum. frcq. of incident light which can emit photoelectrons from a material is known as cut-off frequency.</p>
<p>From eq. KE<sub>max</sub> = hv- hv<sub>0</sub></p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{1}{2} m v_1^2=h(2f)-hf=hf\) → (1)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{1}{2} m v_2^2=h(5f)-hf=4 hf\) → (2)</p>
<p>∴ \(\frac{v_1^2}{v_2^2}=\frac{1}{4} \Rightarrow \frac{v_1}{v_2}=\frac{1}{2} \Rightarrow v_1: v_2=1: 2\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 15. The given graph shows the variation of photo-electric current (I) with the applied voltage (V) for two different materials and for two different intensities of the incident radiation. Identify and explain using, Einstein’s photoelectric equation the pair of curves that correspond to</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Different materials but the same intensity of incident radiation,</li>
<li>Different intensities but the same materials.</li>
</ol>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5001" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Dual-Nature-Of-Radiation-And-Matter-Variation-Of-Photo-Electric-Current.png" alt="Dual Nature Of Radiation And Matter Variation Of Photo Electric Current" width="389" height="330" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Dual-Nature-Of-Radiation-And-Matter-Variation-Of-Photo-Electric-Current.png 389w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Dual-Nature-Of-Radiation-And-Matter-Variation-Of-Photo-Electric-Current-300x254.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 389px) 100vw, 389px" /></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>(1,2) and (3,4) are diff. materials of the same intensity. The saturation current is the same but the stopping potential is different.</li>
<li>( 1,3) and (2,4) have diff. intensities but the same materials. As saturation currents arc differently slopping potential is the same.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Question 16.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Calculate the frequency of a photon of energy 6.5 x 10<sup>-19</sup> J.</li>
<li>Can this photon cause the emission of an electron from the surface of Cs of work function 2.14 eV? If yes, what will be the maximum kinetic energy of the photoelectron?</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>1. Energy E=hv</p>
<p>∴ \(v=\frac{E}{h}=\frac{6.5 \times 10^{-19}}{6.63 \times 10^{-34}}=0.98 \times 10^{15}=9.8 \times 10^{14} \mathrm{Hz}\)</p>
<p>2. Work function Φ<sub>0 </sub>= 2.14 eV</p>
<p>The energy of photons in eV</p>
<p>∴ \(E=\frac{6.5 \times 10^{-19}}{1.6 \times 10^{19}}=4.06 \mathrm{eV}\)</p>
<p>KE<sub>max</sub> = E &#8211; Φ<sub>0</sub> = 4.06 &#8211; 2.1 4 = 1 .92 eV</p>
<h2>CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 11  Dual Nature Of Radiation And Matter Long Questions And Answers</h2>
<p><strong>Question 1.</strong> The photoelectric emission is possible only if the incident light is in the form of packets of energy, each having a definite value, more than the work function of the metal. This shows that light is not of wave nature but of particle nature. It is for this reason that photoelectric emission was accounted for by the quantum theory of light.</p>
<p>(1). <strong>Packets of energy are called</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Electron</li>
<li>Quanta</li>
<li>Frequency</li>
<li>Neutron</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 2. Quanta</p>
<p>(2). <strong>Energy associated with each photon</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>hc</li>
<li>mc</li>
<li>hv</li>
<li>hk</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. hv</p>
<p>(3). <strong>Which of the following waves can produce the photoelectric effect</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>UV radiation</li>
<li>Infrared radiation</li>
<li>Radio waves</li>
<li>Microwaves</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. UV radiation</p>
<p>(4). <strong>The work function of alkali metals is</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Less than zero</li>
<li>Just equal to other metals</li>
<li>Greater than other metals</li>
<li>Quite less than other metals</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. Quite less than other metals</p>
<p><strong>Question 2.</strong> According to de-Broglie a moving material particle sometimes acts as a wave and sometimes as a particle or a wave is associated with a moving material particle which controls the particle in every respect. The wave associated with moving material particles is called matter wave or de-Broglie wave whose wavelength called dc-Broglic wavelength, is given by λ = h/mv.</p>
<p>(1). <strong>The dual nature of light is exhibited by</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Diffraction and photoelectric effect</li>
<li>Photoelectric effect</li>
<li>Refraction and interference</li>
<li>Diffraction and reflection.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. Diffraction and photoelectric effect</p>
<p>(2). <strong>If the momentum of a particle is doubled, then its de-Broglie wavelength will:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Remain unchanged</li>
<li>Become four times</li>
<li>Become two times</li>
<li>Become half</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. Become half</p>
<p>(3). <strong>If an electron and proton are propagating in the form of waves having the same X, it implies that they have the same:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Energy</li>
<li>Momentum</li>
<li>Velocity</li>
<li>Angular momentum</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 2. Momentum</p>
<p>(4). <strong>Velocity of a body of mass m, having de-Broglie wavelength λ, is given by the relation:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>v = λ h/m</li>
<li>v = λ m/h</li>
<li>v = λ/hm</li>
<li>v = h/λm</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. v = h/λm</p>
<p>The post <a rel="nofollow" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics-chapter-11/">Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 11 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter</a> appeared first on <a rel="nofollow" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com">CBSE School Notes</a>.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
					<wfw:commentRss>https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics-chapter-11/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
			<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 10 Wave Optics</title>
		<link>https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics-chapter-10/</link>
					<comments>https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics-chapter-10/#respond</comments>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[Kristensmith Taylor]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Wed, 22 May 2024 05:17:24 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[Class 12 Physics]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://cbseschoolnotes.com/?p=5066</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[<p> CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 10 Wave Optics Multiple Choice Questions And Answers Question 1. The distance between two slits in Young&#8217;s experiment is 0.2 mm. If the wavelength of the light used is 5000 Å, the angular position of the 5th dark fringe from the central bright fringe is _________ rad. 0.11 1.1 0.012 ... <a title="Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 10 Wave Optics" class="read-more" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics-chapter-10/" aria-label="More on Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 10 Wave Optics">Read more</a></p>
<p>The post <a rel="nofollow" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics-chapter-10/">Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 10 Wave Optics</a> appeared first on <a rel="nofollow" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com">CBSE School Notes</a>.</p>
]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<h2> CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 10 Wave Optics Multiple Choice Questions And Answers</h2>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-6860" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Important-Questions-for-CBSE-Class-12-Physics-Chapter-10-Wave-Optics.png" alt="Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 10 Wave Optics" width="798" height="424" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Important-Questions-for-CBSE-Class-12-Physics-Chapter-10-Wave-Optics.png 798w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Important-Questions-for-CBSE-Class-12-Physics-Chapter-10-Wave-Optics-300x159.png 300w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Important-Questions-for-CBSE-Class-12-Physics-Chapter-10-Wave-Optics-768x408.png 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 798px) 100vw, 798px" /></p>
<p><strong>Question 1. The distance between two slits in Young&#8217;s experiment is 0.2 mm. If the wavelength of the light used is 5000 Å, the angular position of the 5<sup>th</sup> dark fringe from the central bright fringe is _________ rad.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>0.11</li>
<li>1.1</li>
<li>0.012</li>
<li>0.0011</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. 0.11</p>
<p><strong>Read and Learn More<a href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics/"> Important Questions for Class 12 Physics with Answers</a></strong></p>
<p>⇒ \(y_n=\frac{5 \lambda D}{d}\)</p>
<p>Angular position,</p>
<p>⇒ \(\theta_n=\frac{n \lambda}{d}\)</p>
<p>∴ \(\theta_5=\frac{5 \lambda}{d}=\frac{5 \times 5000 \times 10^{-10}}{0.2 \times 10^{-3}}\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 2. The angular spread of the central maximum, in the diffraction pattern, does not depend on _________.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>The Distance between the slit and the sources</li>
<li>Wavelength of light</li>
<li>Width of slit</li>
<li>Frequency of light</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. The Distance between the slit and the sources</p>
<p><strong>Question 3. In Young&#8217;s double-slit experiment, the width of the source slit is increased then _______.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>The fringe pattern gets sharper and sharper</li>
<li>Instead of interference, diffraction appears</li>
<li>The angular distance between fringes increased</li>
<li>Fringe pattern gels less and less sharp</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. Fringe pattern gels less and less sharp</p>
<p><strong>Question 4. In a two-slit experiment, the screen is placed one meter away. When light of wavelength 500 nm is used the fringe separation is 0.5 mm. The distance between two slits is ________ mm.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>2</li>
<li>5</li>
<li>1</li>
<li>4</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. 1</p>
<p>⇒ \(\beta=\frac{\lambda \mathrm{D}}{\mathrm{d}}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\mathrm{d}=\frac{\lambda \mathrm{D}}{\beta}=\frac{500 \times 10^-9 \times 1}{0.5 \times 10^{-3}}\)</p>
<p>∴ d = 10<sup>-3</sup> m = 1nm</p>
<p><strong>Question 5. If the phase difference between two waves is 6π radian, then the corresponding path difference is _________.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>6λ</li>
<li>λ</li>
<li>2λ</li>
<li>3λ</li>
</ol>
<p>Answer: 4. 3λ</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{\Delta x}{\lambda}=\frac{\phi}{2 \pi}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\Delta x=\frac{6 \pi}{2 \pi} \times \lambda\)</p>
<p>∴ Δx = 3λ</p>
<p><strong>Question 6. The intensity of a result wave obtained by the superposition of two waves is _______ amplitude of the resultant wave.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Directly proportional to the cube of</li>
<li>Directly proportional to</li>
<li>Directly proportional to the square of</li>
<li>Directly proportional to the square root of</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. Directly proportional to the square of</p>
<h2> CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 10 Wave Optics Assertion And Reason</h2>
<p>For question numbers 1 to 5, two statements are given: Assertion (A) and Reason (R). Select the correct answer to these questions from the codes (1), (2), (3) and (4) as given below.</p>
<ol>
<li>Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A</li>
<li>Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A</li>
<li>A is true but R is false</li>
<li>A is false and R is also false</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Question 1. Assertion:</strong> If white light is used in YDSE, the central bright fringe will be white.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> Because all the wavelengths produce their zero-order maxima at the same position.</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A</p>
<p><strong>Question 2. Assertion:</strong> Diffraction of sound waves is more easily observed than light waves.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> Wavelength of sound waves is more as compared to light.</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A</p>
<p><strong>Question 3. Assertion:</strong> In interference light energy is redistributed.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> There is no gain or loss of energy, which is consistent with the principle of energy conservation.</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A</p>
<p><strong>Question 4. Assertion:</strong> No interference pattern is detected when two coherent sources are infinitely close to each other.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> The fringe width is inversely proportional to the distance between the two slits.</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A</p>
<p><strong>Question 5. Assertion:</strong> In Young&#8217;s experiment, the fringe width for dark fringes is different from that for white fringes.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> In Young&#8217;s double slit experiment the fringes arc formed with a source of white light then only black and bright fringes are observed.</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. A is false and R is also false</p>
<h2> CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 10 Wave Optics Short Questions And Answers</h2>
<p><strong>Question 1. Explain the formation of the fringes due to diffraction at a single slit, when the path difference of light waves from the ends of the slit on reaching a point on the screen is</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>λ</li>
<li>\(\frac{3 \lambda}{2}\)</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>When the path difference is λ. then we get the first minima on screen.</li>
<li>When the Path difference is \(\frac{3 \lambda}{2}\) then we get the first secondary maxima on screen.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Question 2. How would the angular width of the central maximum of diffraction pattern be affected when</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>The width of the slit is decreased, and</li>
<li>Monochromatic light is replaced by polychromatic light. Justify your answers.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>In diffraction</p>
<p>⇒ \(\theta=\frac{2 \lambda}{d}\)</p>
<ol>
<li>Angular width will increase \(\theta \propto \frac{1}{d}\)</li>
<li>The diffracted image gets dispersed into constituent colours of white light.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Question 3. Compare the interference pattern observed in Young&#8217;s double-slit experiment with the single-slit diffraction pattern, pointing out three distinguishing features.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5095" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Wave-Optics-Youngs-Double-Slit-Experiment.png" alt="Wave Optics Young's Double Slit Experiment" width="687" height="433" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Wave-Optics-Youngs-Double-Slit-Experiment.png 687w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Wave-Optics-Youngs-Double-Slit-Experiment-300x189.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 687px) 100vw, 687px" /></p>
<p><strong>Question 4. Define the term wavefront. State Huygen&#8217;s principle. Consider a plane wave front incident on a thin convex lens. Draw a proper diagram to show how the incident wave from transverse through the lens and after refraction focuses on the focal point of the lens, giving the shape of the emergent wavefront.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p><strong>Wavefront:</strong> The Locus of all the points vibrating in the same phase is called wavefront.</p>
<p><strong>Huygens Principle</strong> states that every point on a wavefront is a source of new disturbance which travels further in the form of secondary wavelets. These wavelets spread out in the forward direction at the same speed as the source wave. A new wavefront is a tangential surface to the secondary wavelets.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5096" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Wave-Optics-Huygens-Principle.png" alt="Wave Optics Huygen's Principle" width="447" height="294" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Wave-Optics-Huygens-Principle.png 447w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Wave-Optics-Huygens-Principle-300x197.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 447px) 100vw, 447px" /></p>
<p><strong>Question 5.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Derive Snell’s law on the basis of Huygens wave Ihcory when light is travelling from a denser to a rarer medium.</li>
<li>Draw the sketches to differentiate between plane wavefront and spherical wavefront.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5097" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Wave-Optics-Snells-Law.png" alt="Wave Optics Snell's Law" width="387" height="354" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Wave-Optics-Snells-Law.png 387w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Wave-Optics-Snells-Law-300x274.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 387px) 100vw, 387px" /></p>
<p><strong>Proof of SNELL’S Law:</strong></p>
<p>Consider a plane wavefront (AB) incident on the surface XY. separating two media. Let the secondary wavelets from point (B) reach up to point (C) in lime (t). So draw an arc of length (v<sub>2</sub>t) from point A to locate the position of refracted WF. Now we draw a tangent (CD) on this arc where CD represents refracted WF.</p>
<p>Incident ray, refracted ray &amp; the normal arc respectively1 to incident WF. refracted WF and surface XY.</p>
<p>Also, \(\sin \mathrm{i}=\frac{\mathrm{BC}}{\mathrm{AC}}=\frac{v_1 t}{A C}\) → (1)</p>
<p>and \(\sin r=\frac{A D}{A C}=\frac{v_2 t}{A C}\) → (2)</p>
<p>From (1) and (2)</p>
<p>∴ \(\frac{v_1}{v_2}=\frac{\sin i}{\sin r}\)</p>
<p>Or \(\frac{\mu_2}{\mu_1}=\frac{\sin i}{\sin r}\)</p>
<p>Hence Snell&#8217;s law is proved</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5098" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Wave-Optics-Plane-Wavefront-And-Spherical-Wavefront.png" alt="Wave Optics Plane Wavefront And Spherical Wavefront" width="494" height="395" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Wave-Optics-Plane-Wavefront-And-Spherical-Wavefront.png 494w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Wave-Optics-Plane-Wavefront-And-Spherical-Wavefront-300x240.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 494px) 100vw, 494px" /></p>
<p><strong>Question 6.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>In Young’s double slit experiment, two slits arc I mm apart and the screen is placed 1 m away from the slits. Calculate the fringe width when light of wavelength 500 nm is used.</li>
<li>What should be the width of each slit to obtain 10 maxima of the double slit pattern within the central maximum of the single slit pattern?</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>d = 1 mm, D = I m, λ = 500 nm (given)</p>
<p>∴ \(\beta=\frac{\lambda \mathrm{D}}{\mathrm{d}}=\frac{500 \times 10^{-9} \times 1}{10^{-3}} \mathrm{~m}=500 \times 10^{-6} \mathrm{~m}=500 \mu \mathrm{m}\)</p>
<p>2. In single slit diffraction, path diff. = a sinθ ≅ aθ = X ⇒ θ = λ/a</p>
<p>Width of central maxima of single slit = 2λ/a</p>
<p>Width of 10 maxima = 10 x fringe spacing = 10 x λ/6</p>
<p>Width of central maximum of single slit = Width of 10 maxima of double slit</p>
<p>∴ \(\frac{10 \lambda}{d}=\frac{2 \lambda}{a} \Rightarrow a=\frac{d}{5}=0.2 \mathrm{~mm}\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 7. Two harmonic waves of monochromatic light y<sub>1</sub> = a cos ωt and y<sub>2</sub> = a cos(ωt +Φ) are superimposed on each other. Show that the maximum intensity in the interference pattern is four times the intensity due to each slit. Hence write the conditions for constructive and destructive interference in terms of the phase angle Φ.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>Given, y, = a cos ωt, y, = a cos(ωt + Φ)</p>
<p>Resultant displacement is given as:</p>
<p>y = y<sub>1</sub> +y<sub>2</sub></p>
<p>= a cos ωt + a cos(ωt + Φ)</p>
<p>= a cos ωt + a cos ωt cos Φ &#8211; a sin ωt sin Φ</p>
<p>= a cos ωt (1+ cos Φ)- a sin ωt sin Φ</p>
<p>Put R cos θ = a (1 + cos Φ) → (1)</p>
<p>R sin θ = a sin Φ → (2)</p>
<p>By squaring and adding Eqs. (1) and (2), we get</p>
<p>R<sup>2</sup> = a<sup>2</sup>(1+cos<sup>2Φ</sup> + 2cosΦ) + a<sup>2</sup>sin<sup>2Φ </sup>&#8211; 2a<sup>2</sup>( 1 + cos Φ ) = 4a<sup>2</sup>cos<sup>2</sup>Φ/2</p>
<p>∴ \(I=R^2=4 a^2 \cos ^2 \frac{\phi}{2}=4 I_0 \cos ^2 \frac{\phi}{2}\)</p>
<p>1. For constructive interference,</p>
<p>∴ \(\cos \frac{\phi}{2}= \pm 1 \text { or } \frac{\phi}{2}=n \pi \text { or } \phi=2 n \pi, n=0,1,2 \ldots\)</p>
<p>2. For destructive interference,</p>
<p>∴ \(\cos \frac{\phi}{2}=0 \text { or } \frac{\phi}{2}=(2 n+1) \frac{\pi}{2} \text { or } \phi=(2 n+1) \pi, n=0,1,2 \ldots\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 8.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>If one of two identical slits producing interference in Young&#8217;s experiment is covered with glass, so that the light intensity passing through it is reduced to 50%, find the ratio of the maximum and minimum intensity of the fringe in the interference pattern.</li>
<li>What kind of fringes do you expect to observe if white light is used instead of monochromatic light?</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>1. Let the intensity through one of the slits be I<sub>1</sub> =1.</p>
<p>So. intensity of light through the slit covered by glass</p>
<p>I<sub>2</sub> = 0.5I</p>
<p>Maximum intensity \(I_{\max }=\left(\sqrt{I_1}+\sqrt{I_2}\right)^2\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(I_{\mathrm{max}}=(\sqrt{\mathrm{I}}+\sqrt{0.5 \mathrm{I}})^2=2.9 \mathrm{I}\)</p>
<p>Minimum Intensity = \(I_{\min }=\left(\sqrt{I_1}-\sqrt{I_2}\right)^2\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(I_{\min }=(\sqrt{I}-\sqrt{0.5 I})^2=0.086 I\)</p>
<p>Thus ratio of intensities \(\frac{I_{\max }}{I_{\min }}=\frac{2.9}{0.086}=33.8\)</p>
<p>2. If white light is used in place of monochromatic light, then the central fringe will be white and some coloured fringes will be seen adjacent to the central fringe.</p>
<p><strong>Question 9. Explain the following, giving reasons:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>When monochromatic light is incident on a surface separating two media, the reflected and refracted light both have the same frequency as the incident frequency.</li>
<li>When light travels from a rarer to a denser medium, the speed decreases, does this decrease in speed imply a reduction in the energy carried by the wave?</li>
<li>In the wave picture of light, the intensity of light is determined by the square of the amplitude of the wave. What determines the intensity in the photon picture of light?</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Reflection and refraction arise through the interaction of incident light with the atomic constituents of matter. Atoms may be viewed as oscillators, which light up the frequency of the external agency (light) causing forced oscillations. The frequency of emitted light by a charged oscillator equals to its freq. of oscillation. Thus, the frequency of scattered light equals the frequency of incident light.</li>
<li>No, the energy carried by a wave depends on the amplitude of the wave, not on the speed of<br />
wave.</li>
<li>For a given frequency, the intensity of light in the photon picture is determined by the no. of photons lulling on unit area per unit time.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Question 10. Monochromatic light of wavelength 600 nm is incident from air on a water surface. The refractive index of water is 1.33. Find the</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Wavelength,</li>
<li>Frequency and</li>
<li>Speed, of reflected and refracted light.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p><strong>Given:</strong> X = 600 nm, \(\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{w}}=\frac{4}{3}=1.33\)</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5099" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Wave-Optics-Monochromatic-Light.png" alt="Wave Optics Monochromatic Light" width="428" height="384" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Wave-Optics-Monochromatic-Light.png 428w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Wave-Optics-Monochromatic-Light-300x269.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 428px) 100vw, 428px" /></p>
<p>Frequency of incident ray</p>
<p>⇒ \(c=f \lambda \Rightarrow f=\frac{c}{\lambda}=\frac{3 \times 10^8}{600 \times 10^{-10}}\)</p>
<p>f = 5 x 10<sup>14</sup> Hz</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5100" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Wave-Optics-Frequency-Of-Incident-Ray.png" alt="Wave Optics Frequency Of Incident Ray" width="610" height="439" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Wave-Optics-Frequency-Of-Incident-Ray.png 610w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Wave-Optics-Frequency-Of-Incident-Ray-300x216.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 610px) 100vw, 610px" /></p>
<p><strong>Question 11.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Stale two conditions for two light sources to be coherent.</li>
<li>Give two points of difference between an interference pattern due to a double-slit and a diffraction pattern due to a single slit.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Two sources are said to be coherent if-
<ul>
<li>These produce waves of the same frequency with</li>
<li>Constant or zero phase difference</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Interference is the result of the superposition of secondary wavelets from two different slits while diffraction results due to the superposition of secondary wavelets from different parts of the same source slit.
<ul>
<li>In the interference pattern, all maxima are equally bright while in the case of diffraction, maxima are of decreasing intensity.</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Question 12. How is the spacing between fringes in a double slit experiment affected if:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>The slits separation is increased.</li>
<li>The colour of light used is changed from red to blue.</li>
<li>The whole apparatus is submerged in an oil with a refractive index of 1.2.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Justify your answer in each case</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>Spacing between fringes in a double slit experiment is given by \(\beta=\frac{\lambda \mathrm{D}}{\mathrm{d}}\)</p>
<p>Where, λ =&gt; Wavelength of light; d ⇒ Slit separation; D ⇒ Distance between slit and screen</p>
<p>On increasing *d’ fringe width decreases</p>
<p>λ<sub>red</sub> &gt; λ<sub>blue</sub>. So &#8216;β&#8217; decreases.</p>
<p>When the whole apparatus is immersed in oil of refractive index 1 .2. the wavelength decreases.</p>
<p>∴ \(\lambda^{\prime}=\frac{\lambda}{1.2}\)</p>
<p>∴ \(\beta^{\prime}=\frac{\lambda^{\prime} \mathrm{D}}{\mathrm{d}}\)= \(\beta^{\prime}=\frac{\beta}{1.2}\)</p>
<p>It means fringe width decreases.</p>
<h2> CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 10 Wave Optics Long Questions and Answers</h2>
<p><strong>Question 1.</strong> Wavefront is a locus of points which vibrates in the same phase. A ray of light is perpendicular to the wavefront. According to Huygens principle, each point of the wavefront is the source of a secondary disturbance and the wavelets connecting from these points spread out in all directions with the speed of the wave. The figure shows a surface XY separating two transparent media. medium- 1 and medium-2. The lines ah and cd represent wavefronts of a light wave\e tra\elling in medium- 1 and incident on XY. The lines of and gh represent wavefronts of the light wa\c in medium -2 after refraction.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5101" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Wave-Optics-Wvavefront-Is-A-Focus-Length-Of-Point.png" alt="Wave Optics Wvavefront Is A Focus Length Of Point" width="335" height="287" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Wave-Optics-Wvavefront-Is-A-Focus-Length-Of-Point.png 335w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Wave-Optics-Wvavefront-Is-A-Focus-Length-Of-Point-300x257.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 335px) 100vw, 335px" /></p>
<p>(1). <strong>Light travels as a</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Parallel beam in each medium</li>
<li>Convergent beam in each medium</li>
<li>Divergent beam in each medium</li>
<li>Divergent beam in one medium and convergent beam in the other medium</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. Parallel beam in each medium</p>
<p>(2). <strong>The phases of the light wave at c, d, c and f are Φ<sub>c</sub>, Φ<sub>d</sub><span style="font-size: inherit;">, Φ</span><sub>e</sub><span style="font-size: inherit;">, and Φ<sub>f </sub></span><span style="font-size: inherit;">respectively. It is given that Φ<sub>c</sub> = Φ<sub>f</sub></span></strong></p>
<ol>
<li><span style="font-size: inherit;">Φ<sub>c</sub></span> can not be equal to <span style="font-size: inherit;">Φ<sub>d</sub></span></li>
<li><span style="font-size: inherit;">Φ<sub>d</sub></span> can be equal to <span style="font-size: inherit;">Φ<sub>e</sub></span></li>
<li>(<span style="font-size: inherit;">Φ<sub>d </sub></span>&#8211; <span style="font-size: inherit;">Φ<sub>f</sub></span>) is equal to (<span style="font-size: inherit;">Φ<sub>c</sub></span>&#8211; <span style="font-size: inherit;">Φ<sub>e</sub></span>)</li>
<li>(<span style="font-size: inherit;">Φ<sub>d</sub></span>&#8211; <span style="font-size: inherit;">Φ<sub>c</sub></span> ) is not equal to (<span style="font-size: inherit;">Φ<sub>f </sub></span>&#8211; <span style="font-size: inherit;">Φ<sub>e</sub></span>)</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. (<span style="font-size: inherit;">Φ<sub>d </sub></span>&#8211; <span style="font-size: inherit;">Φ<sub>f</sub></span>) is equal to (<span style="font-size: inherit;">Φ<sub>c</sub></span>&#8211; <span style="font-size: inherit;">Φ<sub>e</sub></span>)</p>
<p>(3). <strong>Wavefront is the locus of all points, where the particles of the medium vibrate with the same</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Phase</li>
<li>Amplitude</li>
<li>Frequency</li>
<li>Period</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. Phase</p>
<p>(4). <strong>A point source that emits waves uniformly in all directions, produces wavefronts that are</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Spherical</li>
<li>Elliptical</li>
<li>Cylindrical</li>
<li>Planar</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. Spherical</p>
<p><strong>Question 2.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Define a wavefront. Using Huygens principle, verify the laws of reflection at a plane Surface</li>
<li>In a single slit diffraction experiment, the width of the slit is made double the original width. How does this affect the size and intensity of the central diffraction band? Explain.</li>
<li>When a tiny circular obstacle is placed in the path of light from a distant source, a bright spot is seen at the centre of the obstacle. Explain why?</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>1. The wavefront is defined as a surface of constant phase.</p>
<p>(Alternatively: The wavefront is the locus of all points in the same phase).</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5102" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Wave-Optics-Surface-Of-Constant-Phase.png" alt="Wave Optics Surface Of Constant Phase" width="463" height="249" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Wave-Optics-Surface-Of-Constant-Phase.png 463w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Wave-Optics-Surface-Of-Constant-Phase-300x161.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 463px) 100vw, 463px" /></p>
<p>Let the speed of the wave in the medium be &#8216;v&#8217;</p>
<p>Let the time taken by the wavefront, to advance from point B to point C is &#8216;τ&#8217;</p>
<p>Hence BC = vτ</p>
<p>Let CE represent the reflected wavefront. Distance AE = vτ = BC</p>
<p>Δ AEC and Δ ABC are congruent</p>
<p>∴ ∠ABC = ∠AEC(90°)</p>
<p>AC = AC</p>
<p>AE = BC.</p>
<p>So, ∠BAC = ∠ECA (by corresponding part of congruent triangles)</p>
<p>= ∠i = ∠r (proved)</p>
<p>2. If the width of the slit is made double then the size of the central maxima reduces to half and intensity increases upto four times.</p>
<p>3. This is because of the diffraction of light.</p>
<p>[Alternatively: Light gels diffracted by the tiny circular obstacle and reach the centre of the shadow of the obstacle.]</p>
<p>[Alternatively: There is a maxima, at the centre of the obstacle, in the diffraction pattern produced by it.]</p>
<p><strong>Question 3.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Give an expression for path difference in Young&#8217;s double slit experiment and obtain the conditions for constructive and destructive interference at a point on the screen.</li>
<li>The intensity at the central maxima in Young’s double-slit experiment is I<span style="font-size: inherit;"><sub>0</sub></span>. Find out the intensity at a point where the path difference is \(\frac{\lambda}{6},\frac{\lambda}{4} \text { and } \frac{\lambda}{3}\)</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>1. <strong>Conditions for interference of light:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Both sources of light must be coherent.</li>
<li>Both sources of light should be monochromatic.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Expression for fringe width in Young&#8217;s double slit experiment:</strong></p>
<p>Path difference between the light waves reaching point P from S<span style="font-size: inherit;"><sub>1</sub></span> and S<span style="font-size: inherit;"><sub>2</sub></span></p>
<p>Δx = S<span style="font-size: inherit;"><sub>2</sub></span>P -S<span style="font-size: inherit;"><sub>1</sub></span>P</p>
<p>Path difference \((\Delta \mathrm{x})=\frac{\mathrm{y}_{\mathrm{n}} \mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{D}}\)</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5103" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Wave-Optics-Fringe-Width-Youngs-Double-Slit-Experiment.png" alt="Wave Optics Fringe Width Young's Double Slit Experiment" width="481" height="323" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Wave-Optics-Fringe-Width-Youngs-Double-Slit-Experiment.png 481w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Wave-Optics-Fringe-Width-Youngs-Double-Slit-Experiment-300x201.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 481px) 100vw, 481px" /></p>
<p><strong>Case (1) Position of bright fringes:</strong></p>
<p>If n<sup>th</sup> bright fringe occurs at point P. then the path difference</p>
<p>Δx = nλ</p>
<p>∴ \(\frac{y_n d}{D}=n \lambda \Rightarrow y_n=\frac{n \lambda D}{d} \text { where } n=0,1,2,3, \ldots .\)</p>
<p>y<sub>n</sub> ⇒ position of n<sup>th</sup> bright fringe on screen from the central bright fringe.</p>
<p><strong>Case (2) Position of dark fringes:</strong></p>
<p>Path difference for n<sup>th</sup> dark fringe</p>
<p>Δx = (2n &#8211; I )λ/2</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{y_n^{\prime} d}{D}=(2 n-1) \lambda/2\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(y_n^{\prime}=\frac{(2 n-1) \lambda D}{2 d} \text { where } n=1,2,3, \ldots .\)</p>
<p>y&#8217;<sub>n</sub> ⇒ position of n<sup>th</sup> dark fringe.</p>
<p><strong>Fringe width:</strong></p>
<p>The distance between two consecutive bright or dark fringes is called fringe width.</p>
<p>fringe width \((\beta)=y_{n+1}-y_n\) (Taking Condition for bright fringe \(y_n=\frac{n{\lambda}D}{\mathrm{d}}\))</p>
<p>⇒ \(\beta=\frac{(n+1)\lambda D}{d}-\frac{n \lambda D}{d}\)</p>
<p>∴ \(\beta=\frac{\lambda D}{d}\)</p>
<p><strong>Intensity distribution curve:</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5104" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Wave-Optics-Intensity-Distribution-Curve.png" alt="Wave Optics Intensity Distribution Curve" width="672" height="304" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Wave-Optics-Intensity-Distribution-Curve.png 672w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Wave-Optics-Intensity-Distribution-Curve-300x136.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 672px) 100vw, 672px" /></p>
<p>2. As we Know, I = 4I<sub>0</sub> Cos<sup>2</sup>(Φ/2)</p>
<p>Φ = Phase difference</p>
<p>⇒ \(\phi=\frac{2 \pi}{\lambda} \cdot \Delta x\) (Δx = path diff.)</p>
<p>(1) From, \(\phi=\frac{2 \pi}{\lambda} \cdot \Delta x=\frac{2 \pi}{\lambda} \cdot \frac{\lambda}{6}\)</p>
<p>Φ = π/3 = 60°</p>
<p>So, \(I=4 I_0 \cos ^2 30^{\circ}=4 I_0 \cdot \frac{3}{4}\)</p>
<p>I = 3I<sub>0</sub></p>
<p>(2). From \(\phi=\frac{2 \pi}{\lambda} \cdot \Delta x=\frac{2 \pi}{\lambda} \cdot \frac{\lambda}{4}=\frac{\pi}{2}=90^{\circ}\)</p>
<p>So, \(I=4 I_0 \cos ^2 45^{\circ}=4 I_0 \cdot \frac{1}{2}\)</p>
<p>I = 2 I<sub>0</sub></p>
<p>(3). From, \(\phi=\frac{2 \pi}{\lambda} \cdot \Delta x=\frac{2 \pi}{\lambda} \cdot \frac{\lambda}{3}=\frac{2 \pi}{3}=120^{\circ}\)</p>
<p>So, \(I=4 I_0 \cos ^2 60^{\circ}=4 I_0 \cdot \frac{1}{4}\)</p>
<p>I = I<sub>0</sub></p>
<p><strong>Question 4.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>State the essential conditions for diffraction of light.</li>
<li>Explain the diffraction of light due to a narrow single slit and the formation of a pattern of fringes on the screen.</li>
<li>Find the relation for the width of central maximum in terms of wavelength ‘λ&#8217; width of slit ‘a’, and separation between slit and screen ‘D&#8217;.</li>
<li>If the width of the slit is made double the original width, how does it affect the size and intensity of the central band?</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>1. The wavelength of light should be comparable to the site of the obstacle,</p>
<p>2. Suppose a plane wavefront is incident on a slit AH (of width b), every part of the exposed part of the plane wavefront (i.e., every part of the slit) acts as a source of secondary wavelets spreading in all directions.</p>
<p>The diffraction is obtained on a screen placed at a large distance. (In practice, this condition is achieved by placing the screen at the focal plane of a converging lens placed to alter the slit).</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5105" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Wave-Optics-Plane-Wave-Front-Is-Incident-On-A-Slit.png" alt="Wave Optics Plane Wave Front Is Incident On A Slit" width="449" height="372" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Wave-Optics-Plane-Wave-Front-Is-Incident-On-A-Slit.png 449w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Wave-Optics-Plane-Wave-Front-Is-Incident-On-A-Slit-300x249.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 449px) 100vw, 449px" /></p>
<ul>
<li>The diffraction pattern consists of a central bright fringe (central maxima) surrounded by dark and bright lines (called secondary minima and maxima).</li>
<li>At point 0 on the screen, the central maxima is obtained. The wavelets originating from points A and B meet in the same phase at this point, hence at 0, intensity is maximum.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Secondary minima</strong></p>
<p>For obtaining n<sup>th</sup> secondary minima at P on the screen, the path difference between the diffracted waves Δ = b sinθ = nλ (n = 0,1, 2, &#8230; )</p>
<p>Angular position of n<sup>th</sup> secondary minima</p>
<p>⇒ \(\sin \theta \simeq 0=\frac{n {\lambda}}{b}\)</p>
<p>Distance of nth secondary minima from central maxima</p>
<p>⇒ \(x_n=D \cdot \theta=\frac{n \lambda D}{b}=\frac{n \lambda f}{b}\)</p>
<p>where D = distance between slit and screen.</p>
<p>f ≅ D = Focal length of converging lens.</p>
<p><strong>Secondary maxima:</strong></p>
<p>For nth secondary maxima at P on the screen.</p>
<p>Path difference. \(\Delta=b \sin \theta =(2 n+1) \frac{\lambda}{2}\); where n = 1,2,3&#8230;.</p>
<p>Angular position of n<sup>th</sup> secondary maxima</p>
<p>∴ \(\sin \theta \simeq \theta=\frac{(2 n+1) \lambda}{2 b}\)</p>
<p>Distance of nth secondary maxima,from central maxima</p>
<p>∴ \(x_n=D \cdot \theta=\frac{(2 n+1) \lambda D}{2 b}=\frac{(2 n+1) \lambda f}{2 b}\)</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5106" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Wave-Optics-Secondary-Maxima.png" alt="Wave Optics Secondary Maxima" width="629" height="388" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Wave-Optics-Secondary-Maxima.png 629w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Wave-Optics-Secondary-Maxima-300x185.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 629px) 100vw, 629px" /></p>
<p>3. <strong>The Central Maximum:</strong></p>
<p>The width of the central maximum is simply the distance between the 1<sup>st</sup> order minima from the centre of the screen on both sides of the centre.</p>
<p>The position of the minima given by &#8216;y&#8217; (measured from the centre of the screen) is:</p>
<p>The position of the minima given by ‘y’ (measured from the centre of the screen) is:</p>
<p>∴ \(\tan \theta \simeq \theta=\frac{y}{D}\)</p>
<p>For small θ, sinθ ≅ θ</p>
<p>λ = bsinθ &#8211; bθ</p>
<p>⇒ \(\theta=\frac{y}{D}=\frac{\lambda}{b}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(y=\frac{\lambda D}{b}\)</p>
<p>The width of the central maximum is simply twice this value width of central maximum = \(2 \frac{\lambda D}{b}\)</p>
<p>angular width of central maximum = 2θ = \(2 \frac{\lambda}{b}\)</p>
<p>4. If the width of the slit is made double then the size of the central maxima reduces to half and intensity increases upto four times.</p>
<p>The post <a rel="nofollow" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics-chapter-10/">Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 10 Wave Optics</a> appeared first on <a rel="nofollow" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com">CBSE School Notes</a>.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
					<wfw:commentRss>https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics-chapter-10/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
			<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments</title>
		<link>https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics-chapter-9/</link>
					<comments>https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics-chapter-9/#respond</comments>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[Kristensmith Taylor]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Wed, 22 May 2024 05:16:07 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[Class 12 Physics]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://cbseschoolnotes.com/?p=5116</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[<p> CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 9 Ray Optics And Optical Instruments Multiple Choice Questions And Answers Question 1. For a thin convex lens when the height of the object is double its image, its object distance is equal to ________. f 2f 3f 4f Answer: 3. 3f ⇒ ⇒ ⇒ -f-u = 2f ∴ &#124;u&#124; ... <a title="Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments" class="read-more" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics-chapter-9/" aria-label="More on Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments">Read more</a></p>
<p>The post <a rel="nofollow" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics-chapter-9/">Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments</a> appeared first on <a rel="nofollow" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com">CBSE School Notes</a>.</p>
]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<h2> CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 9 Ray Optics And Optical Instruments Multiple Choice Questions And Answers</h2>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-6858" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Important-Questions-for-CBSE-Class-12-Physics-Chapter-9-Ray-Optics-and-Optical-Instruments.png" alt="Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments" width="885" height="409" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Important-Questions-for-CBSE-Class-12-Physics-Chapter-9-Ray-Optics-and-Optical-Instruments.png 885w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Important-Questions-for-CBSE-Class-12-Physics-Chapter-9-Ray-Optics-and-Optical-Instruments-300x139.png 300w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Important-Questions-for-CBSE-Class-12-Physics-Chapter-9-Ray-Optics-and-Optical-Instruments-768x355.png 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 885px) 100vw, 885px" /></p>
<p><strong>Question 1. For a thin convex lens when the height of the object is double its image, its object distance is equal to ________.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>f</li>
<li>2f</li>
<li>3f</li>
<li>4f</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. 3f</p>
<p>⇒ \(m=\frac{f}{f-u}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(-\frac{1}{2}=\frac{f}{f-(-u)}\)</p>
<p>⇒ -f-u = 2f</p>
<p>∴ |u| = 3f</p>
<p><strong>Read and Learn More<a href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics/"> Important Questions for Class 12 Physics with Answers</a></strong></p>
<p><strong>Question 2. Which of the following is responsible for the glittering of diamonds?</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Interference</li>
<li>Diffraction</li>
<li>Total internal reflection</li>
<li>Refraction</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. Total internal reflection</p>
<p><strong>Question 3. The focal length of a thin lens made from the material of a refractive index of 1.5 is 20 cm. When it is placed in a liquid of refractive index 4/3 its focal length will be _________ cm.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>80.00</li>
<li>60.25</li>
<li>45.48</li>
<li>78.23</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. 45.48</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{f_1}{f_a}=\left(\frac{_a \mu_g-1}{_l \mu_z-1}\right)\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{f_l}{20}=\frac{(1.5-1)}{\left(\begin{array}{l}<br />
1.5 \\<br />
1.33<br />
\end{array}\right)}\)</p>
<p>∴ f<sub>l</sub> = 78.23 cm</p>
<p><strong>Question 4. The radii of curvature of both sides of a convex lens are 15 cm and if the refractive index of the material of the lens is 1.5. Then the focal length of the lens in air is _________ cm.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>10</li>
<li>15</li>
<li>20</li>
<li>30</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 2. 15</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{1}{f_a}=\left(_a\mu_g-1\right)\left(\frac{1}{R_1}-\frac{1}{R_2}\right)\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{1}{f_a}=\frac{1}{2}\left(\frac{1}{15}-\frac{1}{-15}\right)\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{1}{f_a}=\frac{1}{2} \times \frac{2}{15}\)</p>
<p>∴ f<sub>a</sub> = 15 cm</p>
<p><strong>Question 5. If the tube length of the astronomical telescope is 105 cm and the magnifying power is 20 for a normal setting, then the focal length of the objective is ________ cm.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>10</li>
<li>20</li>
<li>25</li>
<li>100</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. 100</p>
<p><strong>Question 6. An object is placed at a distance of 25 cm on the axis of a concave mirror having a focal length of 20 cm. What will be the lateral magnification of an image?</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>4</li>
<li>2</li>
<li>-4</li>
<li>-2</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. -4</p>
<p>⇒ \(m=\frac{f}{f-u}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{-20}{-20-(-25)}=\frac{-20}{5}\)</p>
<p>∴ m = -4</p>
<p><strong>Question 7. The depth of a filled well is II m and the refractive index of water is 1.33. If viewed normally from the top, by how much height would the bottom of the well appear to be shifted up?</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>2.73 m</li>
<li>11 m</li>
<li>4.13 m</li>
<li>1.37 m</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. 2.73 m</p>
<p>⇒ \(h=\frac{H}{\mu}=\frac{11}{4} \times 3=\frac{33}{4}\)</p>
<p><strong>Vertical shifted</strong></p>
<p>⇒ \(H-h=11-\frac{33}{4}\)</p>
<p>∴ \(\frac{44-33}{4}=\frac{11}{4}=2.73 \mathrm{~m}\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 8. In an optical fibre, the refractive index of the material of the core is _______ that of the cladding.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Less than</li>
<li>Higher than</li>
<li>Equal to</li>
<li>Half</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 2. Higher than</p>
<p><strong>Question 9. The lower half of the concave mirror&#8217;s reflecting surface is covered with an opaque (non &#8211; reflective) material. The intensity of the image of an object placed in front of the mirror becomes ________.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Four times</li>
<li>Half</li>
<li>One fourth</li>
<li>Double</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 2. Half</p>
<p><strong>Question 10. If the focal length of the converging lens is 0.25 m then the power of this lens is _____ dioptre.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>+2</li>
<li>-4</li>
<li>+4</li>
<li>-2</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. +4</p>
<p>∴ \(P=\frac{1}{f}=\frac{1}{0.25}=4 D\)</p>
<h2> CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 9 Assertion And Reason</h2>
<p>For question numbers 1 to 6 two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct answer to these questions from the codes (1), (2), (3) and (4) as given below.</p>
<ol>
<li>Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A</li>
<li>Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A</li>
<li>A is true but R is false</li>
<li>A is false and R is also false</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Question 1. Assertion:</strong> Critical angle is minimum for violet colour.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> Because critical angle \(\theta_c=\sin ^{-1}\left(\frac{1}{\mu}\right) \text { and } \mu \propto \frac{1}{\lambda} \)</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A</p>
<p><strong>Question 2. Assertion:</strong> Within a glass slab a double convex air bubble is formed. This air bubble behaves like a converging lens.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> The refractive index of air is more than the refractive index of glass.</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. A is false and R is also false</p>
<p><strong>Question 3. Assertion:</strong> A beam of white light gives a spectrum on passing through a hollow prism.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> The speed of light outside the prism is different from the speed of light inside the hollow prism.</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. A is false and R is also false</p>
<p><strong>Question 4. Assertion:</strong> The microscope magnifies the image.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> Angular magnification for images is more than one in the microscope.</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A</p>
<p><strong>Question 5. Assertion:</strong> Spherical aberration occurs in lenses of larger aperture.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> The two types of rays, paraxial and marginal rays focus at different points.</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A</p>
<p><strong>Question 6. Assertion: </strong>The angle of minimum deviation for a prism is lesser for red light than that for blue light.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> The refractive index of the material of a prism for blue light is greater than that for red light.</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A</p>
<h2> CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 9 Short Question And Answers</h2>
<p><strong>Question 1. Light from a point source in the air falls on a convex spherical glass surface with a refractive index of 1.5 and a radius of curvature of 20 cm. The distance of the light source from the glass surface is 100 cm. At what position is the image formed?</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p><strong>Given:</strong> 1 = 1, 2 = 1.5, R = 20cm. u = -100 cm</p>
<p>Form \(\frac{\mu_2}{v}-\frac{\mu_1}{u}=\frac{\mu_2-\mu_1}{R} \Rightarrow \frac{1.5}{v}-\frac{1}{-100}=\frac{0.5}{20}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{1.5}{v}=\frac{5}{200}-\frac{1}{100}=\frac{3}{200} \text { or } v=100 \mathrm{~cm}\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 2. A beam of light converges at a point P. A lens is placed in the path of the beam at a distance of 25 cm from P. The final image is formed at infinity. Calculate the power of the lens.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>So, u = 25 cm, v = ∞</p>
<p>⇒ \(\mathrm{f}=-25 \mathrm{~cm}=-\frac{25}{100} \mathrm{~m}=-\frac{1}{4} \mathrm{~m}\)</p>
<p>∴ \(P=\frac{l}{f}=-4 D\)</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5309" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-A-Beam-Of-Light.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments A Beam Of Light" width="331" height="303" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-A-Beam-Of-Light.png 331w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-A-Beam-Of-Light-300x275.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 331px) 100vw, 331px" /></p>
<p><strong>Question 3. A ray of light falls on a transparent sphere of μ = √3 at an angle of incidence 60° with the diameter AB of the sphere having centre C. The ray emerges from the sphere parallel to the line AB. Find the angle of emergence.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5310" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-A-Ray-Of-Light-Falls-On-A-Transparent-Sphere.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments A Ray Of Light Falls On A Transparent Sphere" width="440" height="284" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-A-Ray-Of-Light-Falls-On-A-Transparent-Sphere.png 440w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-A-Ray-Of-Light-Falls-On-A-Transparent-Sphere-300x194.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 440px) 100vw, 440px" /></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>⇒ \(\mu=\frac{\sin i}{\sin r_1}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\sqrt{3}=\frac{\sin 60^{\circ}}{\sin r_1}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\sin r_1=\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2} \times \frac{1}{\sqrt{3}}\)</p>
<p>r<sub>1</sub> = 30°</p>
<p>i.e. r<sub>1</sub> = r<sub>2</sub> = 30° so, e = 60° [angle of emergence]</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5311" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Angle-Of-Emergence.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments Angle Of Emergence" width="349" height="282" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Angle-Of-Emergence.png 349w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Angle-Of-Emergence-300x242.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 349px) 100vw, 349px" /></p>
<p><strong>Question 4.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Explain briefly how the focal length of a convex lens changes with an increase in the wavelength of incident light.</li>
<li>Explain briefly how the focal length of a convex lens changes when it is immersed in water. The refractive index of the material of the lens is greater than that of water.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>1. From \(\mu=\frac{\mathrm{c}}{\mathrm{v}}=\frac{\mathrm{c}}{\mathrm{v \lambda}}\)</p>
<p>Here, refractive index \(\mu \propto \frac{1}{\lambda}\)</p>
<p>So, (.t of a lens increases with the decrease in wavelength of the incident light.</p>
<p>From \(\frac{1}{f}=(\mu-1)\left(\frac{1}{R_1}-\frac{1}{R_2}\right)\)</p>
<p>We can say focal length will increase with the increase in wavelength and vice versa.</p>
<p>2. From, \(\frac{1}{f}=\left(\frac{\mu_2}{\mu_1}-1\right)\left[\frac{1}{R_1}-\frac{1}{R_2}\right]\) 2 (lens) = 1.5, 1 (Water) = 1.33</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{1}{f}=\left(\frac{1.5}{1.33}-1\right)\left[\frac{1}{R_1}-\frac{1}{R_2}\right]\) When lens placed in water</p>
<p>Clearly \(\left(\frac{\mu_2}{\mu_1}\right)\) decreases which means focal length increases.</p>
<p><strong>Question 5. A ray PQ incident normally on the refracting face BA is refracted in the prism BCA made of material of refractive index 1.5. Complete the path of the ray through the prism. From which face will the ray emerge?</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5312" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-A-Prism.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments A Prism" width="284" height="316" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-A-Prism.png 284w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-A-Prism-270x300.png 270w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 284px) 100vw, 284px" /></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>Refractive index (μ) = 1.5 (given)</p>
<p>Ray PQ will go straight in ΔBAC as it falls normally on the surface BA. From the condition of TIR.</p>
<p>⇒ \(\sin \mathrm{i}_C=\frac{1}{\mu}=\frac{1}{1.5}=\frac{2}{3}=0.66\)</p>
<p>or i<sub>c</sub> = 42° (∵ sin 42° = 0.66)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{\sin i}{\sin r}=\frac{\mu_2}{\mu_1}=\frac{2}{3}\)</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5313" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-The-Emerge.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments The Emerge" width="353" height="312" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-The-Emerge.png 353w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-The-Emerge-300x265.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 353px) 100vw, 353px" /></p>
<p>or \(\frac{\sin 30^{\circ}}{\sin r}=\frac{2}{3}\)</p>
<p>or sin r = 0.75</p>
<p>or r = 48.5° (∵ sin 48.5° = 0.75)</p>
<p>So ray PQ will emerge from surface AC at an angle = 48.5°</p>
<p><strong>Question 6. A beam of light converges at a point P. Draw ray diagrams to show where the beam will converge if</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>A convex lens, and</li>
<li>A concave lens is kept in the path of the beam.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5314" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Convex-And-Concave-Lens.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments Convex And Concave Lens" width="629" height="250" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Convex-And-Concave-Lens.png 629w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Convex-And-Concave-Lens-300x119.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 629px) 100vw, 629px" /></p>
<p><strong>Question 7. A coin is placed inside a denser medium. Why does it appear to be raised? Obtain an expression for the height through which the object appears to be raised in terms of the refractive index of the medium and real depth.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>Because of Refraction, it appears to be raised.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5315" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Rarer-Denser.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments Rarer Denser" width="328" height="292" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Rarer-Denser.png 328w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Rarer-Denser-300x267.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 328px) 100vw, 328px" /></p>
<p>⇒ \(\Delta \mathrm{OMP} \rightarrow \sin i=\frac{\mathrm{MP}}{\mathrm{OM}}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\Delta \mathrm{XMP} \rightarrow \sin r=\frac{\mathrm{MP}}{\mathrm{XM}}\)</p>
<p>So, \(\text { So, }{ }_d \mu_r=\frac{\sin i}{\sin r}=\frac{X M}{O M}\)</p>
<p>If M and P are closer, then XM ≅ XP = h&#8217; (Apparent depth), OM = OP = H (Actual Depthdepth)</p>
<p>⇒ \({ }_d \mu_r=\frac{h^{\prime}}{h}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{1}{{ }_r \mu_d}=\frac{h^{\prime}}{h}\)</p>
<p>∴ \(h^{\prime}=\frac{h}{\mu}\) (\(\left[d \mu_r=\frac{1}{\mu_d}=\frac{1}{_r\mu_1}\right]\))</p>
<p>Thus the height (vertical shift) through which, the object appears to be raised</p>
<p>∴ \(\Delta=h-h^{\prime}=h\left(1-\frac{1}{\mu}\right)\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 8. Under what conditions does the phenomenon of total internal reflection lake place? Draw a ray diagram showing how a ray of light deviates by 90° after passing through a right-angled isosceles prism.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p><strong>Conditions:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>The light must move from a denser to a rarer medium.</li>
<li>The angle of incidence must be greater than the critical angle.</li>
</ol>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5316" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Critical-Angle.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments Critical Angle" width="300" height="328" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Critical-Angle.png 300w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Critical-Angle-274x300.png 274w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 300px) 100vw, 300px" /></p>
<p><strong>Question 9. State, with the help of a ray diagram, the working principle of optical fibres. Write one important use of optical fibres.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p><strong>Working principle of optical fibres:</strong> Optical fibres are extensively used for transmitting audio and video signals in the form of light from one end to another based on multiple total internal reflections at the interface of inner and outer layers which are known as core and cladding.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5317" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Working-Principle-Of-Optical-Fibers.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments Working Principle Of Optical Fibers" width="553" height="251" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Working-Principle-Of-Optical-Fibers.png 553w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Working-Principle-Of-Optical-Fibers-300x136.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 553px) 100vw, 553px" /></p>
<p><strong>Use:</strong> Used in visual examination of Internal organs like the stomach and intestine by the endoscopy in medical Science</p>
<p><strong>Question 10. Which two aberrations do objectives of refracting telescope suffer from? How are these overcome in reflecting telescopes?</strong></p>
<p><strong>Two Aberrations:</strong> Spherical aberration &amp; chromatic aberration. Spherical aberration in mirrors is corrected by using parabolic mirrors and in lenses it is corrected by using a lens with a small aperture or one side plane.</p>
<p>Chromatic aberration is reduced by using an achromatic combination of lenses in which materials with differing dispersive properties arc assembled to form a compound lens.</p>
<p><strong>Question 11. A compound microscope consists of an objective lens of focal length 2 cm and an eyepiece of focal length 6.25 cm separated by a distance of 15 cm. How far from the objective should an object be placed to obtain the final image at the least distance of distinct vision (25 cm)? Calculate the magnifying power of the microscope.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>f<sub>0</sub> = 2cm. f<sub>e</sub> = 6.25 cm. d = 15 cm. D = 25 cm. v<sub>e</sub> = -25 cm</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{1}{f_e}=\frac{1}{v_e}-\frac{1}{u_e} \Rightarrow \frac{1}{6.25}=\frac{1}{-25}-\frac{1}{u_e} \Rightarrow u_e=-5 \mathrm{~cm}\)</p>
<p>So. the image distance for the objective lens</p>
<p>v<sub>1</sub> = d &#8211; u<sub>e</sub> = 15 &#8211; 5 = 10cm</p>
<p>Now again</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{1}{f_0}=\frac{1}{v_0}-\frac{1}{u_0} \Rightarrow \frac{1}{2}=\frac{1}{10}-\frac{1}{u_0} \Rightarrow u_0=-2.5 \mathrm{~cm}\)</p>
<p>Magnifying Power</p>
<p>⇒ \(m=\frac{-v_0}{u_0}\left(1+\frac{D}{f_c}\right)=\frac{10}{2.5}\left(1+\frac{25}{6.25}\right)\)</p>
<p>m = 20</p>
<p><strong>Question 12.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>An object approaches a converging lens with a uniform speed of 5 m/s and slops at the focus. How- will the image move for the lens? Specify its nature.</li>
<li>In a simple microscope, a convex lens of focal length 5 cm is used. Calculate the magnifying power when the object is placed at the focus of the lens.</li>
<li>What is the power of a biconvex lens of refractive index n<sub>2</sub> dipped in a liquid of refractive index n<sub>1</sub>? where n<sub>1</sub> &lt; n<sub>2</sub>?</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>1. Moves away from the lens with a non-uniform speed.</p>
<p>For example: If f = 20 m,</p>
<p>u = -50m. -45m, -40m. -34m</p>
<p>v = 33.3m, 36m. 40m, 46.7m [by using lens formula]</p>
<p>2. \(m=\frac{D}{f}=\frac{25}{5}=5\)</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5318" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Equiconvex-lens.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments Equiconvex lens" width="287" height="277" /></p>
<p>The lens behaves as a convex lens</p>
<p>⇒ \(\mathrm{P}=\frac{1}{\mathrm{f}}=\left(_1\mathrm{n}_2-1\right)\left(\frac{1}{\mathrm{R_1}}-\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}_2}\right)\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(P=\left(\frac{n_2}{n_1}-1\right)\left(\frac{1}{R_1}-\frac{1}{R_2}\right)\)</p>
<p><sub>1</sub>n<sub>2</sub> &lt; <sub>a</sub>n<sub>2</sub> (∵ n<sub>1</sub> can not be less than 1 )</p>
<p>So. Focal length will increase. power will decrease.</p>
<p><strong>Question 13. Draw a labelled ray diagram of a refracting telescope. Deduce an expression of magnifying power of it. Write two main limitations of a refracting-type telescope or a reflecting-type telescope.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p><strong>Refracting Telescope:</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5319" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Refracting-Telescope.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments Refracting Telescope" width="752" height="383" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Refracting-Telescope.png 752w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Refracting-Telescope-300x153.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 752px) 100vw, 752px" /></p>
<p>Refracting type telescope consists of an objective lens of large aperture and large focal length whereas an eyepiece is of small aperture and small focal length.</p>
<p><strong>Magnifying Power:</strong></p>
<p>It is the ratio of visual angle substandard by the final image at the eye to the visual angle subtended by an object.</p>
<p>⇒ \(M=\frac{\beta}{\alpha} \quad\left\{\begin{array}{l}<br />
\text { if } \alpha \text { and } \beta \text { are very small } \\<br />
\alpha \approx \tan \alpha \text { and } \beta \approx \tan \beta<br />
\end{array}\right.\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(M=\frac{\tan \beta}{{tan} \alpha} \Rightarrow M=\frac{\left(\frac{A^{\prime} B^{\prime}}{O_2 B^{\prime}}\right)}{\left(\frac{A^{\prime} B^{\prime}}{O_1 B^{\prime}}\right)} ⇒ M=\frac{O_1 B^{\prime}}{O_2 B^{\prime}}=\frac{-f_0}{u_e}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(M=\frac{-f_0}{u_e}\) (1)</p>
<p>1. When the final image is formed at least a distance of distinct Vision (V<sub>e</sub> = D)</p>
<p>Applying lens formula for eyepiece:</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{1}{f_e}=\frac{1}{v_e}-\frac{1}{u_e} \quad\left\{\begin{array}{l}<br />
\text { applying sign convention } \\<br />
v_e=-D . \quad u_e=-u_e<br />
\end{array}\right.\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{1}{f_e}=-\frac{1}{D}+\frac{1}{u_e} \Rightarrow \frac{1}{u_e}=\frac{1}{f_e}+\frac{1}{D} \Rightarrow \frac{f_0}{u_e}=f_0\left(\frac{1}{f_e}+\frac{1}{D}\right) \Rightarrow \frac{f_0}{u_e}=\frac{f_0}{f_e}\left(1+\frac{f_e}{D}\right)\)</p>
<p>Hence magnifying power from eq (1)</p>
<p>∴ \(M=-f_0\left[\frac{1}{f_e}+\frac{1}{D}\right]\)</p>
<p>2. When the final image is formed at infinity (u<sub>e</sub> = f<sub>e</sub> )</p>
<p>From eq. (i)</p>
<p>∴ \(M=\frac{-\mathrm{f}_0}{\mathrm{f}_e}\)</p>
<p><strong>Drawbacks of refracting telescope:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>A defect of chromatic aberration occurs in refracting-type telescopes.</li>
<li>It has a small resolving power</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Question 14. </strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Draw a ray diagram depicting the formation of the image by an astronomical telescope in normal adjustment.</li>
<li>You are given the following three lenses. Which two lenses will you use as an eyepiece and as an objective to construct an astronomical telescope? give reason.</li>
</ol>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5362" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Astronomical-telescope-1.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments Astronomical telescope." width="493" height="244" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Astronomical-telescope-1.png 493w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Astronomical-telescope-1-300x148.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 493px) 100vw, 493px" /></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5320" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Astronomical-Telescope.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments Astronomical Telescope..." width="682" height="423" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Astronomical-Telescope.png 682w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Astronomical-Telescope-300x186.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 682px) 100vw, 682px" /></p>
<p>2. &#8216;L<sub>1</sub>&#8216; is used for an objective as it has the largest focal length which is needed, \(M_0=\frac{f_0}{f_e}\) for better-magnifying power. &#8216;L<sub>3</sub>&#8216; is Used for an eyepiece to get better angular magnification, as from \(M_{0}=\frac{f_{0}}{f_e}\) least f<sub>e</sub> is needed.</p>
<p><strong>Question 15.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>A convex lens of focal length 30 cm is in contact with a concave lens of focal length 20 cm. Find out if the system is converging or diverging.</li>
<li>Obtain the expression for the angle of incidence of a ray of light, which is incident on the face of a prism of refracting angle A so that it suffers total internal reflection at the other face. (Given, the refractive index of the glass of the prism is μ.)</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>1. Focal length of convex lens f<sub>1</sub> = 30 cm</p>
<p>the focal length of the concave lens f<sub>2</sub> = -20 cm</p>
<p>Equivalent focal length of combination</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{1}{f}=\frac{1}{f_1}+\frac{1}{f_2} \Rightarrow \frac{1}{f}=\frac{1}{30}-\frac{1}{20} \Rightarrow \frac{1}{f}=-\frac{1}{60} \Rightarrow f =-60 \mathrm{~cm}\)</p>
<p>The system is diverging.</p>
<p>2. For total internal reflection.</p>
<p>⇒ \(\sin i_c=\frac{1}{\mu}\)</p>
<p>For Prism we know that</p>
<p>r<sub>1</sub> + r<sub>2</sub> = A and r<sub>2</sub> = i<sub>c</sub></p>
<p>∴ r<sub>1</sub> = A -i<sub>c</sub></p>
<p>Applying Snell’s law at point &#8216;Q&#8217;</p>
<p>∴ \(\frac{\sin i}{\sin f_i}=\mu\)</p>
<p>sin i = μ sin r<sub>1</sub> ⇒ sin i = μ sin (A- i<sub>c</sub>)</p>
<p>i = sin<sup>-1</sup> |μ sin-(A-i<sub>c</sub>)|</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5321" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Angle-Of-Incidence-Of-A-Ray-Of-Light.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments Angle Of Incidence Of A Ray Of Light" width="327" height="292" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Angle-Of-Incidence-Of-A-Ray-Of-Light.png 327w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Angle-Of-Incidence-Of-A-Ray-Of-Light-300x268.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 327px) 100vw, 327px" /></p>
<p><strong>Question 16.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Name the phenomenon on which the working of an optical fibre is based.</li>
<li>Draw a labelled diagram of an optical fibre and show how light propagates through the optical fibre using this phenomenon.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>1. Total internal reflection (TIR)</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5322" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Optical-Fiber.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments Optical Fiber" width="712" height="203" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Optical-Fiber.png 712w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Optical-Fiber-300x86.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 712px) 100vw, 712px" /></p>
<p><strong>Question 17.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>A screen is placed at a distance of 100 cm from an object. The image of the object is formed on the screen by a convex lens for two different locations of the lens separated by 20 cm. Calculate the focal length of the lens used.</li>
<li>A converging lens is kept coaxially in contact with a diverging lens with equal focal length. What is the focal length of the combination?</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>1. For the first position of the lens, we have</p>
<p>∴ \(\frac{1}{f}=\frac{1}{y}-\frac{1}{(-x)}\) → (1)</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5323" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Convex-Lens.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments Convex Lens" width="601" height="360" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Convex-Lens.png 601w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Convex-Lens-300x180.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 601px) 100vw, 601px" /></p>
<p>For the second position of the lens, we have (2)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{1}{f}=\frac{1}{y-20}-\frac{1}{[-(x+20)]}\) →(2)</p>
<p>From (1) and (2)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{1}{y}+\frac{1}{x}=\frac{1}{(y-20)}+\frac{1}{(x+20)} \Rightarrow \frac{x+y}{x y}=\frac{(x+20)+(y-20)}{(y-20)(x+20)}\)</p>
<p>∴ xy = (y &#8211; 20) (x + 20) = xy &#8211; 20 x + 20 y- 400</p>
<p>∴ x &#8211; y = -20</p>
<p>Also, x + y = 100</p>
<p>x= 40 cm and y = 60 cm</p>
<p>∴ \(\frac{1}{f}=\frac{1}{60}-\frac{1}{-40}=\frac{2+3}{120}=\frac{5}{120}\)</p>
<p>∴ f = 24 cm</p>
<p>or</p>
<p>Distance between the image (screen) and the object, D = 100 cm.</p>
<p>Distance between two locations of the convex lens, d = 20cm</p>
<p>Focal length (f) = \(=\frac{D^2-d^2}{4 D}=\frac{(100)^2-(20)^2}{4 \times 100}\)</p>
<p>f = 24 cm.</p>
<p>2. \(\frac{1}{f}=\frac{1}{f_1}+\frac{1}{\left(-f_2\right)}=\frac{1}{f_1}-\frac{1}{f_2}\)</p>
<p>⇒ [/altex]\frac{1}{f}=\frac{f_2-f_1}{f2 f_1}[/latex]</p>
<p>∴ \(f=\frac{f_2 f_1}{f_2-f_1}\)</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5324" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Focal-Length-Of-The-Combination.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments Focal Length Of The Combination" width="281" height="298" /></p>
<p><strong>Question 18. </strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Monochromatic light of wavelength 589 nm is incident from air on a water surface. If μ for water is 1.33, find the refracted light&#8217;s wavelength, frequency and speed.</li>
<li>A double convex lens is made of glass with a refractive index of 1.55, with both faces of the same radius of curvature. Find the radius of curvature required, if the focal length is 20 cm.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>1. \(\lambda_{\text {air }}=589 \mathrm{~nm}, \mu_{\text {water }}=1.33\) (Given)</p>
<p>For water, \(\lambda_{w a t e r}, \frac{\mu_n}{\mu_a}=\frac{\lambda_a}{\lambda_n} \Rightarrow \lambda_w=\frac{589}{1.33}\)</p>
<p>∴ w = 442.8nm</p>
<p>Frequency of light remains constant.</p>
<p>Velocity, \(v=\frac{c}{\mu}=\frac{3 \times 10^8}{1.33}=2.25 \times 10^8 \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}\)</p>
<p>2. From \(\frac{1}{f}=\left(\mu_{21}-1\right)\left[\frac{1}{R_1}-\frac{1}{R_2}\right] \quad\left\{\begin{array}{l}<br />
\text { Using sign Convention } \\<br />
R_1=+R \quad \text { for equi convex lens } \\<br />
R_2=-R<br />
\end{array}\right.\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{1}{f}=(1.55-1)\left[\frac{1}{R}-\left(-\frac{1}{R}\right)\right]\)</p>
<p>∴ \(\frac{1}{r}=(.55)\left[\frac{2}{R}\right]=\frac{1.1}{R} \Rightarrow \frac{1}{20}=\frac{1.1}{R} \Rightarrow R=1.1 \times 20=22 \mathrm{~cm}\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 19.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>A triangular prism with a refracting angle of 60° is made of a transparent material of refractive index 2/√3.</li>
<li>A ray of light is incident normally on the face AB as shown in the figure. Trace the path of the ray as it passes through the prism and calculate the angle of emergence and angle of deviation.</li>
</ol>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5325" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-A-Triangular-Prism.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments A Triangular Prism" width="289" height="295" /></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5326" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Angle-Of-Emergence-And-Angle-Of-Deviation.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments Angle Of Emergence And Angle Of Deviation" width="296" height="287" /></p>
<p><strong>Given:</strong> ∠A = 60°, ∠i = 0°</p>
<p><strong>At M:</strong> \(\sin \mathrm{i}_{\mathrm{C}}=\frac{1}{\mu}=\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}=\sin 60^{\circ}\)</p>
<p>∴ i<sub>c</sub> = 60°</p>
<p>So the ray PQ after refraction from the face AC grazes along AC.</p>
<p>∴ ∠e = 90°</p>
<p>From ∠i = ∠e = ∠A + ∠δ</p>
<p>or 0° + 90° = 60° + ∠δ</p>
<p>∴ δ = 90° &#8211; 60° = 30°</p>
<p><strong>Question 20.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>What is total internal reflection? Under what conditions does it occur?</li>
<li>Find a relation between critical angle and refractive index.</li>
<li>Name one phenomenon which is based on total internal reflection</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>The complete reflection of a light ray at the boundary of two media, when the ray is going from a denser to a rarer medium is called TIR.</p>
<p><strong>Condition:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Light rays must pass from a denser to a rarer medium</li>
<li>the angle of incidence must be greater than the critical angle, (i &gt; i<sub>c</sub>).</li>
</ol>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5327" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Critical-Angle-And-Refractive-Index.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments Critical Angle And Refractive Index" width="677" height="245" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Critical-Angle-And-Refractive-Index.png 677w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Critical-Angle-And-Refractive-Index-300x109.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 677px) 100vw, 677px" /></p>
<p>In the above Ray Ao goes from denser (say water) to rarer (say air) medium, So using Snell&#8217;s law, \(\frac{\sin i}{\sin r}=\frac{\mu_2}{\mu_1}\)</p>
<p>or \(\frac{\sin i_c}{\sin 90^{\circ}}=\frac{\mu_2}{\mu_1}\) [Here, angle of incidence = ic and angle of refraction = 90°]</p>
<p>If refractive index of rarer medium = 1 (i.e. 2 = 1)</p>
<p>or \(\sin i_c=\frac{1}{\mu_1}=\frac{1}{\mu}\) = (∵ \(\))</p>
<p>3. Mirage or Brilliance of diamond.</p>
<p><strong>Question 21. In the following diagram, an object ‘O&#8217; is placed 15 cm in front of a convex lens L<sub>1</sub> of focal length 20 cm and the final image is formed at ‘I’ at a distance of 80 cm from the second lens L<sub>2</sub>. Find the focal length of the lens L<sub>2</sub>.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5328" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-The-Focal-length-Of-The-Lens.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments The Focal length Of The Lens" width="535" height="348" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-The-Focal-length-Of-The-Lens.png 535w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-The-Focal-length-Of-The-Lens-300x195.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 535px) 100vw, 535px" /></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5329" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-The-Focal-length-Of-The-Lens-1.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments The Focal length Of The Lens.." width="543" height="303" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-The-Focal-length-Of-The-Lens-1.png 543w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-The-Focal-length-Of-The-Lens-1-300x167.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 543px) 100vw, 543px" /></p>
<p><strong>For Lens L<sub>1</sub>:</strong> \(\frac{1}{v_1}-\frac{1}{u_1}=\frac{1}{f_1} \Rightarrow \frac{1}{v_1}=\frac{1}{f_1}+\frac{1}{u_1}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{1}{v_1}=\frac{1}{20}+\frac{1}{-15}\)</p>
<p>v<sub>1</sub> &#8211; 60 cm</p>
<p>Now image formed (v<sub>1</sub>) acts as an object for L<sub>2</sub>.</p>
<p>For lens L2: \(\frac{1}{v_2}-\frac{1}{u_2}=\frac{1}{f_2} \Rightarrow \frac{1}{80}+\frac{1}{75}=\frac{1}{f_2} \Rightarrow \frac{1}{f_2}=\frac{31}{1200}\)</p>
<p>∴ \(\mathrm{f}_2=\frac{1200}{31} 38.71 \simeq 39 \mathrm{~cm}\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 22.</strong> <strong>Describe the construction of a compound microscope. Derive an expression for its total magnification. Draw a ray diagram for the formation of an image by a compound microscope.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p><strong>Compound Microscope:</strong> Figure shows a ray diagram of a compound microscope. It consists of two convex lenses one nearer to the object is known as the objective and the other closest to the eye is the eyepiece lens. Here objective lens is of small focal length (f<sub>0</sub>) and small aperture whereas the eyepiece is also of small focal length but larger than the objective lens and relatively large aperture</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5330" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Compound-Microscope.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments Compound Microscope" width="700" height="462" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Compound-Microscope.png 700w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Compound-Microscope-300x198.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 700px) 100vw, 700px" /></p>
<p>The image A&#8217; is formed by the objective lens L<sub>0</sub> of object AB and the final image is A &#8220;B&#8217;.</p>
<p>Magnifying power (M) = \(\frac{\text { Angle subtended by the final image at eye }}{\text { Angle subtended by the object when it is placed at the least distance of distinct vision at eye }}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(M=\frac{\beta}{\alpha} \quad\left\{\begin{array}{l}<br />
\text { if } \alpha \text { and } \beta \text { are very smill. then } \\<br />
\alpha=\tan \alpha \text { and } \beta=\tan \beta<br />
\end{array}\right.\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(M=\frac{\tan \beta}{\tan \alpha}\)</p>
<p>∴ \(M=\frac{\left(\frac{A^{\prime \prime} B^{\prime \prime}}{D}\right)}{\left(\frac{A B}{D}\right)}\) = \(M=\frac{A^{\prime \prime} B^{\prime \prime}}{A B}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(M=\frac{A^{\prime \prime} B^{\prime \prime}}{A^{\prime} B^{\prime}} \times \frac{A^{\prime} B^{\prime}}{A B} \Rightarrow M=m_e \times m_o \quad\left\{\begin{array}{l}<br />
m_0=\frac{-v_0}{u_0} \\<br />
m_c=\frac{v_e}{u_e}<br />
\end{array}\right.\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\mathrm{M}=\frac{-\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{o}}}{\mathrm{u}_{\mathrm{o}}} \times \frac{\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{c}}}{\mathrm{u}_{\mathrm{c}}}\) (1)</p>
<p>Applying lens Formula for eyepiece \(\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{1}{f_e}=\frac{1}{v_e}-\frac{1}{u_e} \quad\left\{\begin{array}{l}<br />
v_e=-D \\<br />
u_e=-u_e<br />
\end{array}\right.\)</p>
<p>∴  \(\frac{1}{f_e}=-\frac{1}{D}+\frac{1}{u_e} \Rightarrow \frac{D}{f_e}=-1+\frac{D}{u_e}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{D}}{\mathrm{u}_{\mathrm{e}}}=1+\frac{\mathrm{D}}{\mathrm{f}_{\mathrm{e}}}\) (2)</p>
<p>1. When the final image is formed at least the distance of district vision (V<sub>e</sub> = -D)</p>
<p>⇒ \(M=\frac{-V_0}{u_0} \times \frac{D}{U_e}\)</p>
<p>∴ \(M=\frac{-V_0}{u_0}\left(1+\frac{D}{f_e}\right)\) → (3)</p>
<p>2. When the final image is formed at infinity (u<sub>e</sub> = f<sub>e</sub>)</p>
<p>∴ \(M=\frac{{-v_0}}{u_0} \times \frac{D}{1}\) (4)</p>
<p><strong>Question 23.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>For a glass prism (μ = √3) the angle of minimum deviation is equal to the angle of the prism. Calculate the angle of the prism.</li>
<li>Draw a ray diagram when the incident ray falls normally on one of the two equal sides of a right-angled isosceles prism having refractive index μ = √3.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p><strong>Given.</strong> δ<sub>m</sub> = A</p>
<p>From \(\mu=\frac{\sin \left(\frac{A+\delta_m}{2}\right)}{\sin (A / 2)}\) = \(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{1}=\frac{\sin \left(\frac{A+A}{2}\right)}{\sin (A / 2)}=\frac{\sin A}{\sin (A / 2)}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\sqrt{3}=\frac{2 \sin (A / 2) \cos (A / 2)}{\sin (A / 2)}\) = \(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}=\cos \mathrm{A} / 2\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\cos 30^{\circ}=\cos (\mathrm{A} / 2) \Rightarrow 30^{\circ}=\mathrm{A} / 2\)</p>
<p>∴ A = 60°</p>
<p>2. Given μ = √3 (Prism)</p>
<p>For total internal reflection, angle of incidence (i) &gt; critical angle (i<sub>c</sub>)</p>
<p>i.e. i &gt; i<sub>c</sub></p>
<p>or sin i &gt; sin i<sub>c</sub></p>
<p>or \(\sin i&gt;\frac{1}{\mu}\)</p>
<p>or \(\sin 45^{\circ}&gt;\frac{1}{\mu}\)</p>
<p>or μ &gt; 2</p>
<p>Hence, ray PQ suffers TIR and goes along path TS.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5333" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Total-Internal-Reflection.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments Total Internal Reflection" width="338" height="366" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Total-Internal-Reflection.png 338w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Total-Internal-Reflection-277x300.png 277w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 338px) 100vw, 338px" /></p>
<p><strong>Question 24.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Draw a schematic diagram of a reflecting telescope</li>
<li>Slate the advantages of reflecting telescope over refracting telescope.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5334" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Reflecting-Telescope.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments Reflecting Telescope" width="507" height="298" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Reflecting-Telescope.png 507w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Reflecting-Telescope-300x176.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 507px) 100vw, 507px" /></p>
<p><strong>Schematic diagram of a reflecting telescope (Cassegrain).</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Reflecting telescopes do not suffer from chromatic aberration.</li>
<li>The intensity of light is higher in the case of a reflecting telescope.</li>
<li>Reflecting telescope’s mirrors arc easier to mount.</li>
<li>Manufacturing of mirrors is cheaper compared to lenses.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Question 25. A symmetric biconvex lens of radius of curvature R and made of glass of refractive index 1.5, is placed on a layer of liquid placed on top of a plane mirror as shown in the figure. An optical needle with its lip on the principal axis of the lens is moved along the axis until its real, inverted image coincides with the needle itself. The distance of the needle itself. The distance of the needle from the lens is measured to be x. On removing the liquid layer and repeating the experiment, the distance is found to be y. Obtain the expression for the refractive index of the liquid in terms of x and y.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5335" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Biconvex-Lens.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments Biconvex Lens" width="299" height="305" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Biconvex-Lens.png 299w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Biconvex-Lens-294x300.png 294w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 299px) 100vw, 299px" /></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>Let μ<sub>1</sub> denote the refractive index of the liquid. When the image of the needle coincides with the needle itself; its distance from the lens, equals the relevant focal length.</p>
<p>With a liquid layer present, the given set-up is equivalent to a combination of the given (convex) lens and a concave plane or piano concave &#8216;liquid &#8216;lens&#8217;.</p>
<p>We have \(\frac{1}{f}=(\mu-1)\left(\frac{1}{R_1}-\frac{1}{R_2}\right)\)</p>
<p>and \(\frac{1}{f}=\frac{1}{f_1}+\frac{1}{f_2}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{1}{x}=\frac{1}{f_l}+\frac{1}{y}\)</p>
<p>as per the given data, we then have</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{1}{r_2}=\frac{1}{y}=(1.5-1)\left[\frac{1}{R}-\left(-\frac{1}{R}\right)\right]=\frac{1}{R} = \left\{\begin{array}{l}<br />
\frac{1}{y}=\frac{1}{R}=\frac{1}{f_2} \\<br />
f=x<br />
\end{array}\right\}\)</p>
<p>∴ \(\frac{1}{x}=\left(\mu_1-1\right)\left(-\frac{1}{R}\right)+\frac{1}{y}=\frac{-\mu_1}{y}+\frac{2}{y}\)</p>
<p>∴ \(\frac{\mu_1}{y}=\frac{2}{y}-\frac{1}{x}=\left(\frac{2 x-y}{x y}\right) \text { or } \mu_1=\left(\frac{2 x-y}{x}\right)\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 26. The figure shows a ray of light falling normally on the face AB of an equilateral glass prism having refractive index \(\frac{3}{2}\), placed in water of refractive index \(\frac{4}{3}\) Will this ray suffer total internal reflection on striking the face AC?</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5336" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Ray-Of-Light.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments Ray Of Light" width="304" height="277" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Ray-Of-Light.png 304w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Ray-Of-Light-300x273.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 304px) 100vw, 304px" /></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>The angle of incidence, of the ray, on striking the face AC is i = 60° (as in figure)</p>
<p>Also. the relative refractive index of glass, concerning the surrounding water, is \(\mu_{\mathrm{r}}=\frac{3 / 2}{4 / 3}=\frac{9}{8}\)</p>
<p>Also \(\sin \mathrm{i}=\sin 60^{\circ}=\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}=\frac{1.732}{2}=0.866\)</p>
<p>For total internal reflection, the required critical angle, in this case, is given by.</p>
<p>⇒\(sin \mathrm{i}_{\mathrm{C}}=\frac{1}{\mu}=\frac{8}{9} \simeq 0.89\)</p>
<p>∴ i &lt; ic</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5337" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Relative-Refractive-Index-Of-Glass.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments Relative Refractive Index Of Glass" width="285" height="290" /></p>
<p>Hence the ray would not suffer total internal reflection on striking the face AC.</p>
<p>[The student may just write the two conditions needed for total internal reflection without analysis of the given case]</p>
<p><strong>Question 27. Establish a relation between focal length, distance of object and distance of image in concave mirror.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5338" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Concave-Mirror.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments Concave Mirror" width="503" height="391" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Concave-Mirror.png 503w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Concave-Mirror-300x233.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 503px) 100vw, 503px" /></p>
<p>u ⇒ distance between pole and object</p>
<p>v ⇒ distance between pole and image</p>
<p>f ⇒ focal length</p>
<p>In ΔA&#8217;FB&#8217; and ΔRFQ</p>
<p>∠QFR = ∠A’FB&#8217; and ∠A&#8217;B&#8217; F = ∠RQF = 90°</p>
<p>∴ ΔA&#8217;FB&#8217;- ΔRFQ. so</p>
<p>\(\frac{A^{\prime} B^{\prime}}{Q R}=\frac{F B^{\prime}}{Q F} \Rightarrow \frac{A^{\prime} B^{\prime}}{A B}=\frac{F B^{\prime}}{Q F}\) (1) (from QR = AB)</p>
<p>Similarly ΔABC ∼ ΔA&#8217;B&#8217;c, hence</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{A^{\prime} B^{\prime}}{A B}=\frac{B^{\prime} C}{B C}\) → (2)</p>
<p>From eq (1) and(2)</p>
<p>∴ \(\frac{\mathrm{FB}^{\prime}}{\mathrm{QF}}=\frac{\mathrm{B}^{\prime} \mathrm{C}}{\mathrm{BC}}\)</p>
<p>Point Q is very close to P, Hence ⇒ QF ≈PF</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{P B^{\prime}-P F}{P F}=\frac{P C-P B^{\prime}}{P B-P C}\)</p>
<p>Applying sign convention, PB&#8217; = -v, PF = -f, PC = -2f and PB = -u-0</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{-v-(-f)}{-f}=\frac{-2 f-(-v)}{u-(-2 f)}\)</p>
<p>On solving, uv &#8211; uf = vf</p>
<p>divide by uvf</p>
<p>∴ \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{f}}=\frac{1}{\mathrm{u}}+\frac{\mathrm{l}}{\mathrm{v}}\)  (This is mirror&#8217;s equation)</p>
<p><strong>Question 28. Refractive indices of the given prism material for Red, Blue and Green colours arc 1 .39. 1 .48 and 1 .42 respectively. Trace the path of rays through the prism</strong>.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5339" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Refractive-Indices-Of-The-Prism.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments Refractive Indices Of The Prism" width="432" height="282" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Refractive-Indices-Of-The-Prism.png 432w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Refractive-Indices-Of-The-Prism-300x196.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 432px) 100vw, 432px" /></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>For TIR</p>
<p>i &gt; i<sub>c</sub></p>
<p>sin i &gt; sin i<sub>c</sub></p>
<p>⇒ \(\sin i&gt;\frac{1}{\mu}\)</p>
<p>cosec i &lt; μ</p>
<p>(μ<sub>R</sub> = 1 .39, μ<sub>G</sub> = 1 .42, μ<sub>B</sub> = 1 .48</p>
<p>Now → cosec 45° = √2 = 1 .414</p>
<p>So, μ<sub>R</sub> &lt; cosec i [Red colour will refract]</p>
<p>μ<sub>B</sub> &gt; cosec i [Blue colour will be internally reflected]</p>
<p>μ<sub>G</sub> &gt; cosec i [Green colour will be internally reflected]</p>
<p><strong>Question 29. Two prisms ABC and DBC are arranged as shown in the figure</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5340" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Refractive-Indices-Of-The-Prism-1.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments Refractive Indices Of The Prism." width="470" height="266" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Refractive-Indices-Of-The-Prism-1.png 470w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Refractive-Indices-Of-The-Prism-1-300x170.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 470px) 100vw, 470px" /></p>
<p>The Ctritical angles for the two prisms concerning air are 41.1 and 45 respectively. Trace the path of the ray through the combination.</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5341" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Two-Prisms.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments Two Prisms" width="274" height="408" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Two-Prisms.png 274w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Two-Prisms-201x300.png 201w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 274px) 100vw, 274px" /></p>
<p><strong>Question 30. </strong></p>
<ol>
<li>An object is placed in front of a converging lens. Obtain the conditions under which the magnification produced by the lens is
<ol>
<li>Negative and</li>
<li>Positive.</li>
</ol>
</li>
<li>A point object is placed at 0 in front of a glass sphere. Show the formation of the image by the sphere.</li>
</ol>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5342" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-The-Critical-Angles-For-The-Two-Prisms.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments The Critical Angles For The Two Prisms" width="288" height="425" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-The-Critical-Angles-For-The-Two-Prisms.png 288w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-The-Critical-Angles-For-The-Two-Prisms-203x300.png 203w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 288px) 100vw, 288px" /></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>1. (1). For negative magnification object is placed beyond the focus:</p>
<p>⇒ \(m=\frac{v}{u}\)</p>
<p>using sign convention</p>
<p>∴ \(\mathrm{m}=-\frac{\mathrm{v}}{\mathrm{u}}\)</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5343" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Converging-Lens.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments Converging Lens" width="405" height="272" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Converging-Lens.png 405w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Converging-Lens-300x201.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 405px) 100vw, 405px" /></p>
<p>(2). For positive magnification object is placed between the focus and the optical centre.</p>
<p>⇒ \(m=\frac{v}{u}\)</p>
<p>Using sign convention \(\mathrm{m}=\frac{-\mathrm{v}}{-\mathrm{u}}\)</p>
<p>∴ \(m=\frac{v}{u}\)</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5344" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Negative-Magnification-Object.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments Negative Magnification Object " width="414" height="299" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Negative-Magnification-Object.png 414w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Negative-Magnification-Object-300x217.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 414px) 100vw, 414px" /></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5346" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Glass-Sphere.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments Glass Sphere" width="617" height="322" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Glass-Sphere.png 617w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Glass-Sphere-300x157.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 617px) 100vw, 617px" /></p>
<p>Refraction through spherical surface ABC</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{\mathrm{n}_2}{\mathrm{v}^{\prime}}-\frac{\mathrm{n}_1}{\mathrm{u}}=\frac{\mathrm{n}_2-\mathrm{n}_1}{\mathrm{R}} \quad\left\{\begin{array}{l}<br />
\text { Refractive index of glass }=3 / 2 \\<br />
\mathrm{u}=-3 \mathrm{r}<br />
\end{array}\right.\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{\frac{3}{2}}{v^{\prime}}-\frac{1}{\left(-3 r\right)}=\frac{\left(\frac{3}{2}-1\right)}{r} = \frac{3}{2 v^{\prime}}=\frac{1}{2 r}-\frac{1}{3 r} = v^{\prime}=9 r\)</p>
<p>Refractive through spherical surface ADC</p>
<p>For refracting surface ADC, the image I&#8217; acts as a virtual object and 1 is the final image</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{\mathrm{n}_2}{\mathrm{v}}-\frac{\mathrm{n}_1}{\mathrm{u}^{\prime}}=\frac{\mathrm{n}_2-\mathrm{n}_1}{\mathrm{R}} = \frac{1}{\mathrm{v}}-\frac{1.5}{\mathrm{u}^{\prime}}=\frac{1-1.5}{-\mathrm{r}}\) (u&#8217; = 9r &#8211; 2r = 7r)</p>
<p>∴ \(\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1.5}{7 r}=\frac{0.5}{r} = \frac{1}{v}=\frac{1}{2 r}+\frac{1.5}{7 r} = \frac{1}{v}=\frac{1.5}{7 r}+\frac{0.5}{r}=\frac{1.5+3.5}{7 r} = v =\frac{7 r}{5}\)</p>
<p>Distance of final image from &#8216;B&#8217;</p>
<p>∴ \(\frac{7 r}{5}+2 r=\frac{17 r}{5}=3.4 \mathrm{r}\)</p>
<h2> CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 9 Long Questions And Answers</h2>
<p><strong>Question 1.</strong> Optical fibres Nowadays optical fibres are extensively used for transmitting audio and video signals through long distances. Optical fibres too make use of the phenomenon of total internal reflection. Optical fibre arc fabricated with high-quality composite glass or quartz fibres.</p>
<p>Each fibre consists of a core and cladding. The refractive index of the material of the core is higher than that of the cladding. When a signal in the form of light is directed at one end of the fibre at a suitable angle, it undergoes repeated total internal reflections along the length of the fibre and finally comes out at the other end.</p>
<p>Since light undergoes total internal reflection at each stage, there is no appreciable loss in the intensity of the light signal. Optical fibres are fabricated such that light reflected at one side of the inner surface strikes the other at an angle larger than the critical angle.</p>
<p>Even if the fibre is bent, light can easily travel along its length. Thus, an optical fibre can be used to act as an optical pipe.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5347" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Optical-Fibers.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments Optical Fibers" width="748" height="211" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Optical-Fibers.png 748w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Optical-Fibers-300x85.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 748px) 100vw, 748px" /></p>
<p>(1). <strong>Which of the following statements is not true?</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Optical fibre is based on the principle of total internal reflection.</li>
<li>The refractive index of the material of the core is less than that of the cladding.</li>
<li>An optical fibre can be used to act as an optical pipe.</li>
<li>There is no appreciable loss in the intensity of the light signal while propagating through optical fibre.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 2. The refractive index of the material of the core is less than that of the cladding.</p>
<p>(2). <strong>What is the condition for total internal reflection to occur?</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>The angle of incidence must be equal to the critical angle.</li>
<li>The angle of incidence must be less than the critical angle.</li>
<li>The angle of incidence must be greater than the critical angle.</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. Angle of incidence must be greater than the critical angle.</p>
<p>(3). <strong>Which of the following is not an application of total internal reflection?</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Mirage</li>
<li>Sparkling of diamond</li>
<li>Splitting of white light through a prism.</li>
<li>Reflects the prism.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. Splitting of white light through a prism.</p>
<p>(4). <strong>Optical fibres are used extensively to transmit:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Optical signal</li>
<li>Current</li>
<li>Sound waves</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. Optical signal</p>
<p><strong>Question 2.</strong> The total internal reflection of the light is used in polishing diamonds to create a sparking brilliance. By polishing the diamond with specific cuts, it adjusted most of the light rays approaching the surface arc incident with an angle of incidence more than the critical angle. Hence, they suffer multiple reflections and ultimately come out of the diamond from the top. This gives the diamond a sparking brilliance.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5348" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Polishing-Diamonds-To-Create-A-Sparking-Brilliance.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments Polishing Diamonds To Create A Sparking Brilliance" width="348" height="350" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Polishing-Diamonds-To-Create-A-Sparking-Brilliance.png 348w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Polishing-Diamonds-To-Create-A-Sparking-Brilliance-298x300.png 298w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Polishing-Diamonds-To-Create-A-Sparking-Brilliance-150x150.png 150w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 348px) 100vw, 348px" /></p>
<p>(1). <strong>The refractive index for a diamond is</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>1.41</li>
<li>Same as glass</li>
<li>2.42</li>
<li>1</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. 2.42</p>
<p>(2). <strong>The basic reason for the extraordinary sparkle of a suitably cut diamond is that</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>It has a low refractive index</li>
<li>It has high transparency</li>
<li>It has a high refractive index</li>
<li>It is very hard</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. It has a high refractive index</p>
<p>(3). <strong>The extraordinary sparkling of diamond</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Docs do not depend on their shape</li>
<li>Depends on its shape</li>
<li>Has no fixed reason</li>
<li>None</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. None</p>
<p>(4). <strong>Optical fibre cables work on the principle of</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Dispersion of light</li>
<li>Refraction of light</li>
<li>Total internal reflection</li>
<li>Interference of light</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. Total internal reflection</p>
<p><strong>Question 3.</strong> A compound microscope consists of two converging lenses. One of them, of a smaller aperture and smaller focal length is called an objective and the other of a slightly larger aperture and slightly larger focal length is called an eye-piece. Both lenses are fitted in a tube with an arrangement to vary the distance between them. A tiny object is placed in front of the objective at a distance slightly greater than its focal length. The objective produces the image of the object which acts as an object for the eye-piece. The eyepiece, in turn, produces the final magnified image.</p>
<p>(1). <strong>In a compound microscope the images formed by the objective and the eye-piece are respectively.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Virtual, real</li>
<li>Real, virtual</li>
<li>Virtual, virtual</li>
<li>Real, real</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 2. Real, virtual</p>
<p>(2). <strong>The magnification due to a compound microscope does not depend upon:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>The aperture of the objective and the eye-piece</li>
<li>The focal length of the objective and the eye-piece</li>
<li>The length of the tube</li>
<li>The colour of the light used</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. The aperture of the objective and the eye-piece</p>
<p>(3). <strong>Which of the following is not correct in the context of a compound microscope?</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Both the lenses are of short Focal lengths.</li>
<li>The magnifying power increases by decreasing the local lengths of the two lenses.</li>
<li>The distance between the two lenses is more than (f<sub>0</sub> + f<sub>c</sub>)</li>
<li>The microscope can be used as a telescope interchanging the two lenses.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. The microscope can be used as a telescope interchanging the two lenses</p>
<p>(4). <strong>A compound microscope consists of an objective of 10X and an eye-piece of 20X. the magnification due to the microscope would he:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>2</li>
<li>10</li>
<li>30</li>
<li>200</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. 200</p>
<p>(5). <strong>The focal length of the objective and eye-pic of a compound microscope arc is 1.2 cm and 3.0 cm respectively. The object is placed at a distance of 1.25 cm from the objective. If the final image is formed at infinity, the magnifying power of the microscope would be:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>100</li>
<li>150</li>
<li>200</li>
<li>250</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. 200</p>
<p><strong>Question 4.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Plot a graph to show the variation of the angle of deviation as a function of the angle of incidence for light passing through a prism. Derive an expression for the refractive index of the prism in terms of the angle of minimum deviation and the angle of the prism.</li>
<li>What is the dispersion of light? What is its cause?</li>
<li>A ray of light incident normally on one face of a right-angled isosceles prism is reflected as shown. What must be the minimum value of the refractive index of glass? Give relevant calculations.</li>
</ol>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5349" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Right-Angled-Isosceles-Prism-Is-Totally-Reflected-1.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments Right Angled Isosceles Prism Is Totally Reflected" width="277" height="286" /></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5350" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Angle-Of-Minimum-Deviation-And-Angle-Of-Prism.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments Angle Of Minimum Deviation And Angle Of Prism" width="744" height="422" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Angle-Of-Minimum-Deviation-And-Angle-Of-Prism.png 744w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Angle-Of-Minimum-Deviation-And-Angle-Of-Prism-300x170.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 744px) 100vw, 744px" /></p>
<p>Let PQ and RS be incident and emergent rays. Let the incident ray get deviated by (δ) in a prism.</p>
<p>i.e. ∠TMS = δ</p>
<p>δ<sub>1</sub> and δ<sub>2</sub> are deviations produced at surfaces AB and AC respectively.</p>
<p>∴ δ = δ<sub>1</sub> + δ<sub>2</sub></p>
<p>δ = ( i<sub>1</sub> &#8211; r<sub>1</sub> ) + ( i<sub>2</sub> &#8211; r<sub>2</sub> )</p>
<p>δ = ( i<sub>1</sub> +i<sub>2</sub> )- ( r<sub>1</sub> +r<sub>2 </sub>) → (1)</p>
<p>In quadrilateral AQNR,</p>
<p>A + ∠QNR = 180° ( ∵ QN, RN are normal)</p>
<p>Also, in ΔQNR, ∠QNR + r<sub>1</sub> + r<sub>2</sub> = 180°</p>
<p>δ = r<sub>1</sub> + r<sub>2</sub> → (2)</p>
<p>From eq (1) and (2), we get</p>
<p>δ = ( i<sub>1</sub> +i<sub>2</sub> )- A →(3)</p>
<p>The angle of deviation produced by the prism varies with the angle of incidence. When the prism is adjusted at an angle of minimum deviation, then</p>
<p>i<sub>1</sub> = i<sub>2</sub> = i (suppose)</p>
<p>at δ = δ<sub>m</sub></p>
<p>⇒ r<sub>1 </sub>= r<sub>2 </sub>= r (suppose)</p>
<p>From (1) and (2) we have,</p>
<p>δ<sub>m</sub> = 2i &#8211; 2r</p>
<p>and 2r = A</p>
<p>⇒ \(i=\frac{A+\delta_{m}}{2}\)</p>
<p>r = A/2</p>
<p>∴ Refractive index of material of prism is \(\mu=\frac{\sin \mathrm{i}}{\sin \mathrm{r}}=\frac{\sin \left(\frac{\mathrm{A}+\delta_{\mathrm{m}}}{2}\right)}{\sin \left(\frac{\mathrm{A}}{2}\right)}\).</p>
<p>2. The splitting of white light into bands of seven different colours (<strong>V, I, B, g, Y, O, R</strong>) is called dispersion of white light.</p>
<p>Cause: Different colours travel with velocity while passing through a prism so they get separated.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5352" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Right-Angled-Isosceles-Prism-Is-Totally-Reflected-3.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments Right Angled Isosceles Prism Is Totally Reflected." width="319" height="336" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Right-Angled-Isosceles-Prism-Is-Totally-Reflected-3.png 319w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Right-Angled-Isosceles-Prism-Is-Totally-Reflected-3-285x300.png 285w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 319px) 100vw, 319px" /></p>
<p>From geometry, the angle of incidence at the surface (AC) is 45°. Now as shown ray MN gets reflected at angle 45, i.e, i &gt; i<sub>c</sub></p>
<p>From \(\mu=\frac{1}{\sin i_c}=\frac{1}{\sin 45^{\circ}}=\sqrt{2}\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 5.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Draw a ray diagram to show the image formation by a combination of two thin convex lenses in contact. Obtain the expression for the power of this combination in terms of the focal lengths of the lenses.</li>
<li>A ray of light passing from the air through an equilateral glass prism undergoes minimum deviation when the angle of incidence is \(\left(\frac{3}{4}\right)^{\mathrm{th}}\) of the angle of prism. Calculate the speed of light in the prism.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5353" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Focal-Lengths-Of-The-Lenses.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments Focal Lengths Of The Lenses" width="508" height="378" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Focal-Lengths-Of-The-Lenses.png 508w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Focal-Lengths-Of-The-Lenses-300x223.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 508px) 100vw, 508px" /></p>
<p>The object is placed at point O. whose image is formed at me, by the first lens. As image I<sub>1</sub> is real, it works as a virtual object for second lens B, producing the final image at I.</p>
<p>Since the lenses are thin, assume the optical centres to be coincident. Let this central point be p.</p>
<p>For the image formed by lens A.</p>
<p>\(\frac{1}{v_1}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f_1}\) → (1)</p>
<p>Similarly, for the lens B,</p>
<p>\(\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{v_1}=\frac{1}{f_2}\) → (2)</p>
<p>Add (1) and (2) we get,</p>
\(\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f_1}+\frac{1}{f_2}\)
<p>If a lens system is taken as equivalent to a single lens of focal length f, we get.</p>
<p>\(P=\frac{1}{f}=\frac{1}{f_1}+\frac{1}{f_2}\) → (3)</p>
<p>In terms of power, equation (3) can be written as,</p>
<p>P = P<sub>1</sub> + P<sub>2</sub></p>
<p>Where P is the net power of this combination.</p>
<p>2. Given: (A = angle of prism)</p>
<ul>
<li>ABC is an equilateral triangle. [A = 60°]</li>
<li>\(\angle \mathrm{i}=\frac{3}{4} \mathrm{~A}\)</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5354" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Equilateral-Triangle.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments Equilateral Triangle" width="374" height="291" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Equilateral-Triangle.png 374w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Equilateral-Triangle-300x233.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 374px) 100vw, 374px" /></p>
<p>we know that,</p>
<p>δ =i + c- A</p>
<p>Now in the condition of min. deviation,</p>
<p>i = e, therefore we can write,</p>
<p>δ<sub>m</sub> = i +i- A</p>
<p>or \(\delta_{\mathrm{m}}=2 \mathrm{i}-\mathrm{A} \text { or } \delta_{\mathrm{m}}=2\left(\frac{3 \mathrm{~A}}{4}\right)-\mathrm{A}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\delta_{\mathrm{m}}=\frac{3 \mathrm{~A}}{2}-\mathrm{A}=\frac{\mathrm{A}}{2}=30^{\circ}\)</p>
<p>⇒ δ<sub>m</sub> = 30°</p>
<p>Now, \(\mu=\frac{\sin \left(\frac{A+\delta_m}{2}\right)}{\sin \left(\frac{A}{2}\right)}=\frac{\sin \left(\frac{60^{\circ}+30^{\circ}}{2}\right)}{\sin \left(\frac{60^{\circ}}{2}\right)}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\mu=\frac{\sin 45^{\circ}}{\sin 30^{\circ}}=\sqrt{2}\)</p>
<p>So, \(v=\frac{c}{\mu}=\frac{3 \times 10^8}{\sqrt{2}}=2.1 \times 10^8 \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 6. A point object O on the principal axis of a spherical surface of radius of curvature R separating two media of refractive indices ni and m forms an image T.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Prove that: \(\frac{n_2}{v}-\frac{n_1}{u}=\frac{n_2-n_1}{R}\)</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5355" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Principal-Axis-Of-A-Spherical-Surfaces.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments Principal Axis Of A Spherical Surfaces" width="481" height="286" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Principal-Axis-Of-A-Spherical-Surfaces.png 481w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Principal-Axis-Of-A-Spherical-Surfaces-300x178.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 481px) 100vw, 481px" /></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p><strong>Assumptions:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>The Aperature of the spherical refracting surface is small.</li>
<li>The object is a point object and lies on the principal axis.</li>
<li>Incident ray, refracted ray and normal to the spherical surface make small angles with PA.</li>
</ul>
<p>Let, XPY = Convex spherical refracting surface.</p>
<p>0 = Point object in rarer medium</p>
<p>I = Real image in a denser medium</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5356" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Refractive-And-Normal-Rays-To-The-Spherical-Surfaces.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments Refractive And Normal Rays To The Spherical Surfaces" width="583" height="319" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Refractive-And-Normal-Rays-To-The-Spherical-Surfaces.png 583w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Refractive-And-Normal-Rays-To-The-Spherical-Surfaces-300x164.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 583px) 100vw, 583px" /></p>
<p>From ΔAOC, i = α + γ</p>
<p>From ΔAIC, γ = r + β ⇒ r = γ &#8211; β</p>
<p>From snell’s law, \(\frac{\sin i}{\sin r}=\frac{n_2}{n_1} ⇒ n_1 \sin i=n_2 \sin r\)</p>
<p>Since the angles are small,</p>
<p>∴ n<sub>1</sub> i = n<sub>2</sub> r</p>
<p>Substituting for i and r, in the above eqn, we get</p>
<p>⇒ n<sub>1 </sub>(α + γ) = n<sub>2 </sub>(γ &#8211; β)</p>
<p>or \(n_1\left\{\frac{\mathrm{AM}}{\mathrm{PO}}+\frac{\mathrm{AM}}{\mathrm{MC}}\right\}=\mathrm{n}_2\left\{\frac{\mathrm{AM}}{\mathrm{MC}}-\frac{\mathrm{AM}}{\mathrm{MI}}\right\}\)</p>
<p>Since the aperature is small,</p>
<p>∴ MC = PC, MI = PI</p>
<p>∴ \(\left\{\frac{n_1}{P O}+\frac{n_1}{P C}\right\}=\left\{\frac{n_2}{P C}-\frac{n_2}{P l}\right\}\)</p>
<p>Acc. to sign convention,</p>
<p>PO = -u. PC = R, PI = v</p>
<p>∴ \(\left\{\frac{n_1}{-u}+\frac{n_1}{R}\right\}=\left\{\frac{n_2}{R}-\frac{n_2}{v}\right\}\)</p>
<p>or. \(\frac{n_2}{v}-\frac{n_1}{u}=\frac{n_2-n_1}{R}\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 7.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Derive lens maker&#8217;s formula. Draw the necessary diagram.</li>
<li>A convex lens is placed over a plane mirror. A pin is now positioned so that there is no parallax between the pin and its image formed by this lens-mirror combination. How will you use this observation to find the focal length of the lens? Explain briefly.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>1. <strong>Lens maker’s formula</strong></p>
<p>∴ \(\frac{1}{f}=(n-1)\left[\frac{1}{R_1}-\frac{1}{R_2}\right]\)</p>
<p><strong>Assumptions:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>The lens is considered a thin lens.</li>
<li>An object is a point object which is situated on the principal axis.</li>
<li>The aperture of the lens is small.</li>
<li>Incident and refracted rays make a small angle with the principal axis.</li>
</ol>
<p>Consider a thin convex lens of absolute refractive index n<sub>2</sub> placed in a rarer medium of absolute refractive index n<sub>1</sub>. Also, R<sub>1</sub> and R<sub>2</sub> are the radii of curvature of surfaces XP<sub>1</sub> Y and XP<sub>2</sub> Y respectively.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5357" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Lens-Makers.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments Lens Maker's" width="435" height="307" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Lens-Makers.png 435w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Lens-Makers-300x212.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 435px) 100vw, 435px" /></p>
<p><strong>For refraction at surface XP<sub>1</sub> Y:</strong></p>
<p>‘O’ is the object and I’ is its real image.</p>
<p>Using formula,</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{n_2}{v}-\frac{n_1}{u}=\frac{n_2-n_1}{R}\) we get,</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{n_2}{v^{\prime}}-\frac{n_1}{u}=\frac{n_2-n_1}{R_1}\) → (1)</p>
<p><strong>For refraction at surface XP<sub>2</sub> Y:</strong></p>
<p>F is the virtual object &amp;I is its real image (final image).</p>
<p>Using formula</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{n_1}{v}-\frac{n_2}{u}=\frac{n_1-n_2}{R}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{n_1}{v}-\frac{n_2}{v^{\prime}}=\frac{n_1-n_2}{R_2}\) → (2)</p>
<p>Adding equations (1) and (2). we get</p>
<p>⇒ \(n_1\left(\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}\right)=\left(n_2-n_1\right)\left[\frac{1}{R_1}-\frac{1}{R_2}\right]\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{n_2-n_1}{n_1}\left[\frac{1}{R_1}-\frac{1}{R_2}\right]\)</p>
<p>or \(\frac{1}{f}=\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}=\left(\frac{n_2}{n_1}-1\right)\left[\frac{1}{R_1}-\frac{1}{R_2}\right]\)</p>
<p>or \(\frac{1}{f}=(n-1)\left[\frac{1}{R_1}-\frac{1}{R_2}\right]\) (\(\frac{n_2}{n_1}=n_1=n\))</p>
<p>2. The rays must fall normally on the plane mirror so that the image of the pin coincides with itself.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-5358" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Convex-Lens-Is-Placed-Over-A-Plane-Mirror.png" alt="Ray Optics And Optical Instruments Convex Lens Is Placed Over A Plane Mirror" width="337" height="335" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Convex-Lens-Is-Placed-Over-A-Plane-Mirror.png 337w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Convex-Lens-Is-Placed-Over-A-Plane-Mirror-300x298.png 300w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Ray-Optics-And-Optical-Instruments-Convex-Lens-Is-Placed-Over-A-Plane-Mirror-150x150.png 150w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 337px) 100vw, 337px" /></p>
<p>∴ P is the position of the locus of the lens. i.e.</p>
<p>Distance OP = focal length</p>
<p>The post <a rel="nofollow" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics-chapter-9/">Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments</a> appeared first on <a rel="nofollow" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com">CBSE School Notes</a>.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
					<wfw:commentRss>https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics-chapter-9/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
			<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 12 Atoms</title>
		<link>https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics-chapter-12/</link>
					<comments>https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics-chapter-12/#respond</comments>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[Kristensmith Taylor]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Wed, 22 May 2024 05:03:37 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[Class 12 Physics]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://cbseschoolnotes.com/?p=4934</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[<p>CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 12  Atom Multiple Choice Questions And Answers Question 1. The radius of the second orbit in a hydrogen atom is R. What is the radius in the third orbit? 3R 2.25 R 9R R/3 Answer: 2. 2.25 R Read and Learn More Important Questions for Class 12 Physics with Answers ... <a title="Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 12 Atoms" class="read-more" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics-chapter-12/" aria-label="More on Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 12 Atoms">Read more</a></p>
<p>The post <a rel="nofollow" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics-chapter-12/">Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 12 Atoms</a> appeared first on <a rel="nofollow" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com">CBSE School Notes</a>.</p>
]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<h2>CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 12  Atom Multiple Choice Questions And Answers</h2>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-6865" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Important-Questions-for-CBSE-Class-12-Physics-Chapter-12-Atoms.png" alt="Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 12 Atoms" width="711" height="441" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Important-Questions-for-CBSE-Class-12-Physics-Chapter-12-Atoms.png 711w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Important-Questions-for-CBSE-Class-12-Physics-Chapter-12-Atoms-300x186.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 711px) 100vw, 711px" /></p>
<p><strong>Question 1. The radius of the second orbit in a hydrogen atom is R. What is the radius in the third orbit?</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>3R</li>
<li>2.25 R</li>
<li>9R</li>
<li>R/3</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 2. 2.25 R</p>
<p><strong>Read and Learn More<a href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics/"> Important Questions for Class 12 Physics with Answers</a></strong></p>
<p>W.k.t Radius is n<sup>th</sup> orbit</p>
<p>rn = n<sup>2</sup>R&#8217; → (1)</p>
<p>R = 4R&#8217; → (2) [For 2 Orbit, n= 2]</p>
<p>r<sub>3</sub> = 9R&#8217; → (3) [For 2 Orbit, n= 3]</p>
<p>= \(9 \times \frac{R}{4}\)</p>
<p>∴ r<sub>3</sub> = 2.25 R</p>
<p><strong>Question 2. The wavelength of the first line of the Lyman series is X. The wavelength of the first line in the Balmer series is ______.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>\(\frac{27}{5} \lambda\)</li>
<li>\(\frac{5}{27} \lambda\)</li>
<li>\(\frac{9}{2} \lambda\)</li>
<li>\(\frac{2}{5} \lambda\)</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. \(\frac{27}{5} \lambda\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{1}{\lambda}=\mathrm{R}\left(\frac{1}{n_1^2}-\frac{1}{n_2^2}\right)\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{1}{\lambda}=\mathrm{R}\left(\frac{1}{1}-\frac{1}{2^2}\right)=\frac{3}{4} \mathrm{R} \Rightarrow \mathrm{R}=\frac{4}{3} \lambda\)</p>
<p>So, for Balmer series (n<sub>1</sub> = 2, n<sub>2</sub> = 3)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{1}{\lambda^{\prime}}=\mathrm{R}\left(\frac{1}{4}-\frac{1}{9}\right)\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{1}{\lambda^{\prime}}=\frac{4}{3 \lambda}\left(\frac{5}{36}\right)\)</p>
<p>∴ \(\lambda^{\prime}=\frac{27 \lambda}{5}\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 3. For the first orbit of hydrogen atom the minimum excitation potential is ______ V.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>13.6</li>
<li>3.4</li>
<li>10.2</li>
<li>3.6</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. 10.2</p>
<p><strong>Question 4. An electron with an energy of 12.09 eV strikes a hydrogen atom In the ground state and gives its all energy to the hydrogen atom. Therefore hydrogen atoms are excited to _______ stale.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Fourth</li>
<li>third</li>
<li>Second</li>
<li>First</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. Second</p>
<p>⇒ \(E_n=-\frac{13.6}{n^2}\)</p>
<p>Toral energy gained by hydrogen atoms is</p>
<p>-13.6+12.09 =-1.51 eV</p>
<p>So, \(n^2=\frac{-13.6}{-1.51}=9 \Rightarrow n=3\)</p>
<p>So, second excited state.</p>
<p><strong>Question 5. The ratio of energies of electrons in a second excited state to the first excited slate in H-atom:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>1:4</li>
<li>9:4</li>
<li>4:9</li>
<li>4:4</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. 4:9</p>
<p>⇒ \(E_n=-13.6 \frac{z^2}{n^2}\) (used it)</p>
<p>For the second excited state n = 3 and the first excited state n = 2</p>
<p>∴ \(\frac{E_2}{E_1}=\frac{4}{9}\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 6. For the first orbit of the hydrogen atom, the minimum excitation potential is ______V.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>13.6</li>
<li>3.4</li>
<li>10.2</li>
<li>3.6</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. 10.2</p>
<p><strong>Question 7. If the potential energy of the electron in the hydrogen atom is \(\frac{-e^2}{4 \pi \varepsilon_0 r}\), then what is its kinetic energy?</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>\(\frac{\mathrm{e}^2}{8 \pi \varepsilon_0 \mathrm{r}}\)</li>
<li>\(\frac{-e^2}{4 \pi \varepsilon_0 r}\)</li>
<li>\(\frac{-e^2}{8 \pi \varepsilon_0 r}\)</li>
<li>\(\frac{e^2}{4 \pi \varepsilon_0 r}\)</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. \(\frac{\mathrm{e}^2}{8 \pi \varepsilon_0 \mathrm{r}}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(k_n=-\frac{U n}{2}\)</p>
<p>∴ \(k_n=+\frac{e^2}{8 \pi \varepsilon_0 r}\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 8. What is the angular momentum of an electron of Li-alom in n = 5 orbit?</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>6.625 x 10<sup>-34</sup> Js</li>
<li>5.27 x 10<sup>-34</sup> Js</li>
<li>1.325 x 10<sup>-34</sup> Js</li>
<li>16.56 x 10<sup>-34</sup> Js</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 2. 5.27 x 10<sup>-34</sup> Js</p>
<p>⇒ \(\mathrm{mvr}=\frac{\mathrm{nh}}{2 \pi}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{5 \times 6.62 \times 10^{34}}{2 \times 3.14}\)</p>
<p>∴ 5.27 x 10<sup>-34</sup> Js</p>
<p><strong>Question 9. A hydrogen atom absorbs 12.1 eV of energy and gets excited to a higher energy level. How many photons are emitted during the downward transition? Assume during each downward transition, one photon is emitted.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>2 or 3</li>
<li>1 or 3</li>
<li>1 or 2</li>
<li>5 or more</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. 1 or 2</p>
<p><strong>Question 10. 13.6 eV energy is required to separate a hydrogen atom into a proton and an electron. Compute the orbital radius of the corresponding electron.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>5.3 x 10<sup>-11</sup> m</li>
<li>10.6 x 10<sup>-11</sup> m</li>
<li>2.65 x 10<sup>-11</sup> m</li>
<li>1.33 x 10<sup>-11</sup> m</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. 5.3 x 10<sup>-11</sup> m</p>
<p>⇒ \(\mathrm{E}=-\frac{\mathrm{e}^2}{8 \pi \varepsilon_0 \mathrm{r}}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(r=-\frac{e^2}{8 \pi \varepsilon_0 E}\)</p>
<p>By solving r = 5.29 x 10<sup>-11</sup> m</p>
<p>or</p>
<p>⇒ \(r_1=0.529 \frac{n^2}{Z} Å\)</p>
<p>∴  0.529 A</p>
<p><strong>Question 11. What is the shortest wavelength present in the Paschcn scries of spectral lines?</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>821 nm</li>
<li>6563 A</li>
<li>911 nm</li>
<li>656 mm</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. 821 nm</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{1}{\lambda}=R\left(\frac{1}{n_1^2}-\frac{1}{n_2^2}\right)\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{1}{\lambda}=1.097 \times 10^7\left(\frac{1}{9}-\frac{1}{\infty}\right)\)</p>
<p>λ = 8.21 x 10<sup>-7</sup> m</p>
<p>λ = 821 x nm</p>
<p><strong>Question 12. The total energy and kinetic energy of an electron in hydrogen atom arc E and K respectively.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>K = 2 E</li>
<li>K = -E</li>
<li>\(K=\frac{E}{2}\)</li>
<li>K = E</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 2. K = -E</p>
<p><strong>Question 13. The ionization energy of an electron in the third excited state for a hydrogen atom is _______ eV.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>13.6</li>
<li>1.51</li>
<li>0.85</li>
<li>3.4</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. 0.85</p>
<p>⇒ \(E_n=-\frac{13.6}{n^2}\)</p>
<p>energy of the third excited state</p>
<p>⇒ \(-\frac{13.6}{16}=-0.8 .5 \mathrm{eV}\)</p>
<p>So Ionisation energy</p>
<p>= + 0.85 eV</p>
<p><strong>Question 14. In the Geiger-Marsden scattering experiment, thin gold foil is used to scatter alpha particles because alpha particles will</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Not suffer more than one scattering and the gold nucleus is 50 times heavier than the alpha particle.</li>
<li>Not suffer more than one scattering and the gold nucleus is lighter than the alpha particle.</li>
<li>Not suffer more than a few scattering and the gold nucleus is 25 times heavier than the alpha particle.</li>
<li>Suffer more than one scattering and the gold nucleus is 25 times heavier than an alpha particle.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. Not suffer more than one scattering; the gold nucleus is 50 times heavier than the alpha particle.</p>
<p>Atoms Assertion And Reason</p>
<p>For question numbers 1 to 5 two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct answer to these questions from the codes (1), (2), (3), and (4) as given below.</p>
<ol>
<li>Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A</li>
<li>Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A</li>
<li>A is true but R is false</li>
<li>A is false and R is also false</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Question 1. Assertion:</strong> The mass of the atom is concentrated in the nucleus.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> The mass of a nucleus can be either less than or more than the sum of the masses of nucleons present in it.</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. A is true but R is false</p>
<p><strong>Question 2. Assertion:</strong> Bohr&#8217;s orbits are also called stationary stales.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> In Bohr&#8217;s orbits electron revolves in a fixed path.</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A</p>
<p><strong>Question 3. Assertion:</strong> A hydrogen atom consists of only one electron but its emission spectrum has many lines.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> The Lyman series is found in the emission spectrum.</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 2. Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A</p>
<p><strong>Question 4. Assertion:</strong> For the scattering of a-particles at a large angle only the nucleus of the atom is responsible.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> Nucleus is very heavy in comparison to electrons.</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A</p>
<p><strong>Question 5. Assertion:</strong> Atom arc is not electrically neutral.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> The number of protons and electrons is different</p>
<p>Answer: 4. A is false and R is also false</p>
<h2>CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 12  Atoms Short Questions And Answers</h2>
<p><strong>Question 1. Show that the radius of the orbit in a hydrogen atom varies as n<sup>2</sup> where n is the principal quantum number of the atom.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>Coulomb force: The electrostatic attraction force between the electron and nucleus is _______</p>
<p>⇒ \(\mathrm{F}_{\mathrm{e}}=\frac{\mathrm{kZe}^2}{\mathrm{r}_{\mathrm{n}}^2}\) → (1) \(\left\{\mathrm{F}_{\mathrm{e}}=\frac{\mathrm{k} \mathrm{q}_1 \mathrm{q}_2}{\mathrm{r}^2}\right.\)</p>
<p>Centripetal Force = \(\frac{m v_n^2}{r_n}\)</p>
<p>In equilibrium \(\frac{m v_n^2}{r_n}=\frac{k Z e^2}{r_n^2}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{n}}^2=\frac{\mathrm{kZe^{2 }}}{\mathrm{mr}_{\mathrm{n}}}\) → (2)</p>
<p>Then form Bohr&#8217;s second postulate \(m v_n r_n=\frac{n h}{2 \pi}\)</p>
<p>∴ \(\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{n}}=\frac{\mathrm{nh}}{2 \pi \mathrm{mr}_{\mathrm{n}}}\) → (3)</p>
<p>From eq (2) and (3)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{n^2 h^2}{4 \pi^2 m^2 r_n^2}=\frac{k Z e^2}{m r_n}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(r_n=\left(\frac{h^2}{4 \pi^2 e^2 k m}\right) \frac{n^2}{Z}\)</p>
<p>Put the value, π, k, h, m, e</p>
<p>∴ \(r_n=0.529 \times 10^{-8} \times \frac{n^2}{Z} \mathrm{~cm}=0.529 \times \frac{n^2}{Z}Å\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 2. How does one explain, Bohr’s second postulate of quantization of orbital angular momentum using the de Broglie&#8217;s hypothesis?</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>The behavior of particle waves can be viewed as analogous to the waves traveling on a siring. Particle waves can lead to standing waves held under resonant conditions. When a stationary string is plucked, several wavelengths are excited but only those wavelengths survive which form a standing wave in the string.</p>
<p>Thus, in a string standing waves arc formed only when the total distance traveled by f a wave is an integral number of wavelengths. Hence, for any electron moving in a circular orbit of radius r<sub>n</sub>, the total distance is equal to the circumference of the orbit. 2πr<sub>n</sub> .</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4973" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Atoms-Bohrs-Second-Postulate-Of-Quantization-Of-Orbital-Angular-Momentum.png" alt="Atoms Bohr’s Second Postulate Of Quantization Of Orbital Angular Momentum" width="328" height="378" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Atoms-Bohrs-Second-Postulate-Of-Quantization-Of-Orbital-Angular-Momentum.png 328w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Atoms-Bohrs-Second-Postulate-Of-Quantization-Of-Orbital-Angular-Momentum-260x300.png 260w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 328px) 100vw, 328px" /></p>
<p>2πr<sub>n</sub> = n → (1)</p>
<p>Here, λ is de Broglie wavelength.</p>
<p>We know</p>
<p>λ = h/p</p>
<p>or λ = h/mv<sub>n</sub> → (2)</p>
<p>Where mv<sub>n</sub> is the momentum of an electron revolving in the nth orbit,</p>
<p>From equation (2) and equation (1) we get.</p>
<p>2πr<sub>n</sub> = nh/mv<sub>n</sub></p>
<p>L = mv<sub>n </sub>r<sub>n</sub> = nh/2π</p>
<p>Hence, de Broglie&#8217;s hypothesis successfully proves Bohr’s second postulate.</p>
<p><strong>Question 3. Given the value of the ground state energy of hydrogen atom as -13.6 eV, find out its kinetic and potential energy in the ground and second excited states.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>Ground stale energy of hydrogen atom as -13.6 eV,</p>
<p>E<sub>n</sub> = Total energy = \(-\frac{13.6 \mathrm{eV}}{n^2}\)</p>
<p>K.e = -T.E and P.e = 2 T.E</p>
<p>For ground stale n = 1, then</p>
<p>⇒ \(\mathrm{T} . \mathrm{E} .=\frac{-13.6 \mathrm{eV}}{(1)^2}=-13.6 \mathrm{eV}\)</p>
<p>K.E. = +13.6 eV</p>
<p>P.E. = -27.2 eV</p>
<p>For second excited state n = 3, then</p>
<p>∴ \(\text { T.E. }=\frac{-13.6}{9}=-1.51 \mathrm{eV}\)</p>
<p>K.E. = +1.51 eV</p>
<p>P.E. = -3.02 eV</p>
<p><strong>Question 4. Given the ground stale energy E<sub>0</sub> = -13.6 cV and Bohr radius r<sub>0</sub> = 0.53 Å. Find out how the dc Broglie wavelength associated with the electron orbiting in the ground stale would change when it jumps into the first excited state.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>Given ground slate energy E<sub>0</sub> = &#8211; 13.6 eV</p>
<p>Energy in the first excited state = \(E_1=\frac{-13.6 \mathrm{eV}}{(2)^2}=-3.4 \mathrm{eV}\)</p>
<p>∴ \(\lambda=\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 \mathrm{mE}_1}}=\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34}}{\sqrt{2 \times\left(9.1 \times 10^{-31}\right)\left(3.4 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}\right)}}\)</p>
<p>∴ \(\lambda=\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34}}{9.95 \times 10^{25}}=6.66 \times 10^{-10} \mathrm{~m} \simeq 6.7 \times 10^{-10} \mathrm{~m}\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 5. A hydrogen atom initially in the ground slate absorbs a photon with energy 12.5 eV. Calculate the longest wavelength of the radiation emitted and identify the series to which it belongs.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>We Know, \(\frac{1}{\lambda_{\max }}=R\left(\frac{1}{n_f^2}-\frac{1}{n_i^2}\right)\)</p>
<p>The energy of the incident photon = 12.5 eV</p>
<p>Energy of ground stale = -13.6 eV</p>
<p>∴ The energy of the hydrogen atom after absorption of a photon can be -1.1 eV</p>
<p>This means that electrons can go to the excited state n<sub>i</sub> = 3. Now it emits photons of maximum wavelength on going to n<sub>f</sub> = 2</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{1}{\lambda_{\max }}=\mathrm{R}\left\{\frac{1}{2^2}-\frac{1}{3^2}\right\}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\lambda_{\text {mat }}=\frac{36}{5 \mathrm{R}}=\frac{36}{5 \times 1.1 \times 10^7}=6.545 \times 10^{-7} \mathrm{~m}=6.545 \mathrm{~A}^{\circ}\)</p>
<p>It belongs to the Balmer Series.</p>
<p><strong>Question 6. When is the H<sub>α</sub> line in the emission spectrum of the hydrogen atom for the Balmer series obtained? Calculate the frequency of the photon emitted during this transition.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer: </strong></p>
<p>H<sub>α</sub> is a specific deep-red visible spectral line in the Balmer series with a wavelength of 656.28 nm, it occurs when a hydrogen electron transits from its 3<sup>rd</sup> to 2<sup>nd</sup> lowest energy level.</p>
<p>This transition produces an H-alpha photon and the 1<sup>st</sup> line of the Balmer series.</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{1}{\lambda}=R\left[\frac{1}{n_f^2}-\frac{1}{n_i^2}\right]\)</p>
<p>⇒  \(\mathrm{R}\left[\frac{1}{2^2}-\frac{1}{3^2}\right] \Rightarrow \frac{1}{\lambda}=1.097 \times 10^7\left[\frac{5}{36}\right]\)</p>
<p>∴ \(v=\frac{c}{\lambda}=\frac{3 \times 10^8 \times 1.097 \times 10^7 \times 5}{36}\) = 4.57 x 10<sup>14</sup> Hz</p>
<p><strong>Question 7. The energy levels of a hypothetical atom are shown below. Which of the shown transitions will result in the emission of a photon of wavelength 275 nm?</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4974" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Atoms-Energy-Levels-Of-A-Hypothetical-Atom.png" alt="Atoms Energy Levels Of A Hypothetical Atom" width="337" height="293" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Atoms-Energy-Levels-Of-A-Hypothetical-Atom.png 337w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Atoms-Energy-Levels-Of-A-Hypothetical-Atom-300x261.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 337px) 100vw, 337px" /></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>Using relation, \(\mathrm{E}=\frac{1242 \mathrm{eV}}{\lambda(\text { in } \mathrm{nm})}\)</p>
<p>Here, = 275nm, \(\mathrm{E}=\frac{1242}{275}=4.5 \mathrm{eV}\)</p>
<p>This energy of photon exists corresponding to ‘B&#8217;.</p>
<p><strong>Question 8. State Bohr&#8217;s postulate of hydrogen atom which successfully explains the emission lines in the spectrum of hydrogen atom.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Use the Rydberg formula to determine the wavelength of the line.</strong></p>
<p><strong>[Given : Rydberg constant R = 1.03 x 10<sup>7</sup> m<sup>-1</sup>]</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>According to Bohr’s postulate when an e<sup>&#8211;</sup> jumps from one orbit to another, the energy difference between them is emitted in the form of energy i.e. as a photon which shows the emission lines in the spectrum of hydrogen atoms.</p>
<p>⇒ \(E_i-E_f=h \nu=\frac{h c}{\lambda}\)</p>
<p>Now, the Rydberg formula for the Balmer series is</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{1}{\lambda}=R\left(\frac{1}{n_f^2}-\frac{1}{n_i^2}\right)\) where R = Rydberg constant = 1 .09 x 10<sup>7</sup> m<sup>-1</sup></p>
<p>The H<sub>α</sub>&#8211; line of the Balmer series is obtained when an e jumps to the second orbit (nf = 2) from<br />
the third orbit (n. = 3).</p>
<p>Further, \(\frac{1}{\lambda}=1.03 \times 10^7\left(\frac{1}{2^2}-\frac{1}{3^2}\right)=6.99 \times 10^{-7}=699 \mathrm{~nm}\)</p>
<p>&#8216;λ&#8217; lies in the visible region.</p>
<p><strong>Question 9. Using Rutherford&#8217;s model of the atom, derive the expression for the total energy of a tin electron in the hydrogen atom. What is the significance of total negative energy possessed by the electron?</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>According to Rutherford&#8217;s nuclear model of the atom, the electrostatic force of attraction F<sub>e</sub> between the revolving electron and the nucleus provides the centripetal force (F<sub>c</sub>).</p>
<p>Thus, F<sub>c</sub> = F<sub>e</sub></p>
<p>∴ \(\frac{m v^2}{r}=\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_0} \cdot \frac{e^2}{r^2}\) (∵ z = 1)</p>
<p>Thus the relation between the orbit radius and the e- velocity is, \(\mathrm{r}=\frac{\mathrm{e}^2}{4 \pi \varepsilon_0 \mathrm{mv}^2}\)</p>
<p>The K.E. (K) and electrostatic potential energy (U) of electrons in hydrogen atoms are</p>
<p>⇒ \(K=\frac{1}{2} m v^2=\frac{e^2}{8 \pi \varepsilon_0 r}\)</p>
<p>and \(\mathrm{U}=\frac{-\mathrm{e}^2}{4 \pi \varepsilon_0 \mathrm{r}}\) (-ve sign shows, that the nature of force is attractive)</p>
<p>Thus, the total rnech. energy E of an e<sup>&#8211;</sup> is,</p>
<p>∴ \(\mathrm{E}=\mathrm{K}+\mathrm{U}=\frac{\mathrm{e}^2}{8 \pi \varepsilon_0 \mathrm{r}}-\frac{\mathrm{e}^2}{4 \pi \varepsilon_0 \mathrm{r}}=\frac{-\mathrm{e}^2}{8 \pi \varepsilon_0 \mathrm{r}}\)</p>
<p>Total energy (E) is -ve which shows that e<sup>&#8211;</sup> is bound to the nucleus, if (E) were +ve then e- would leave the the atom.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4975" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Atoms-Rutherford-Model-Of-The-Atom.png" alt="Atoms Rutherford Model Of The Atom" width="283" height="329" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Atoms-Rutherford-Model-Of-The-Atom.png 283w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Atoms-Rutherford-Model-Of-The-Atom-258x300.png 258w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 283px) 100vw, 283px" /></p>
<p><strong>Question 10.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Stale Bohr&#8217;s postulate of the hydrogen atom gives the relationship to the frequency of emitted photons in a transition.</li>
<li>An electron jumps from the fourth to the first orbit in an atom. How many maximum number of spectral lines can be emitted by the atom? To which series do these lines correspond?</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>1. According to Bohr&#8217;s theory, energy is quantized i.c. for each orbital the corresponding energy is<br />
given as</p>
<p>ΔE = hv</p>
<p>2. There will be 6 spectral lines and they correspond to.</p>
<p>Max. number of spectral lines = \(\frac{n(n-1)}{2}\)</p>
<p>For the fourth orbit n = 4</p>
<p>Then, Max. possible lines = \(\frac{4(4-1)}{2}\)</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4976" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Atoms-Bohrs-Postulate-Of-Hydrogen-Atom.png" alt="Atoms Bohr’s Postulate Of Hydrogen Atom" width="395" height="292" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Atoms-Bohrs-Postulate-Of-Hydrogen-Atom.png 395w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Atoms-Bohrs-Postulate-Of-Hydrogen-Atom-300x222.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 395px) 100vw, 395px" /></p>
<p>A-Lyman Series, B-Balmcr series, C-Paschcn series</p>
<p><strong>Question 11. A 12.5 eV electron beam is used to excite a gaseous hydrogen atom at room temperature. Determine the wavelengths and the corresponding series of the lines emitted.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>When an electron beam of 12.5 eV is used to excite hydrogen, then the probable transition is from n=1 to n=3 (i.e. E<sub>3</sub>-E<sub>1</sub> = -1.5l-(-l 3.6) = 12.09e V)</p>
<p>On de-excitation, the electron may jump by following the ways</p>
<p>3 → I, 3 → 2, 2 → 1</p>
<p>Possible wavelength and their corresponding series of lines emitted are</p>
<p>1. From n=3 to n = 1, \(\frac{1}{\lambda}=R\left[\frac{1}{1^2}-\frac{1}{3^2}\right] \Rightarrow \frac{1}{\lambda}=R\left[1-\frac{1}{9}\right]=R\left(\frac{8}{9}\right)\)</p>
<p>or \(\lambda=\frac{9}{8 \mathrm{R}}=1.026 \times 10^{-7} \mathrm{~m}=102.6 \mathrm{~nm}\)</p>
<p>It belongs to the Lyman series.</p>
<p>2. From n = 3 to n = 2,</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{1}{\lambda}=R\left[\frac{1}{2^2}-\frac{1}{3^2}\right]=R\left[\frac{1}{4}-\frac{1}{9}\right] \Rightarrow \frac{1}{\lambda}=R\left[\frac{5}{36}\right]\)</p>
<p>∴ \(\lambda=\frac{36}{5 \mathrm{R}}=6.563 \times 10^{-7} \mathrm{~m}=656.3 \mathrm{~nm}\)</p>
<p>It belongs to the Balmer series.</p>
<p>3. From n = 2 to n = 1,</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{1}{\lambda}=R\left[\frac{1}{1^2}-\frac{1}{2^2}\right]=R\left[1-\frac{1}{4}\right] \Rightarrow \frac{1}{\lambda}=\frac{3 R}{4}\)</p>
<p>A = 1.215 x 1 0<sup>-7</sup>m = 121.5 nm</p>
<p>It belongs to the Lyman series.</p>
<p><strong>Question 12. </strong></p>
<ol>
<li>In A Geiger-Marsden Experiment. Find the distance of the closest approach to the gold nucleus (mass no. = 79)m of a 7.7 Me V α-particle before it comes momentarily to rest and reverses its direction.</li>
<li>Plot a graph between several scattered α-particles detected in the gold foil experiment and the angle of scattering. What is the main assumption in plotting this graph?</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>K.E. = P.E</p>
<p>⇒ \(K E_{\alpha}=\frac{k q_1 q_2}{r}\) where q<sub>1</sub> = 79e, q<sub>2</sub> = 2e</p>
<p>So r = \(\mathrm{r}=\frac{\mathrm{kq}_1 \mathrm{q}_2}{\mathrm{KE}_\alpha}=\frac{9 \times 10^9 \times\left(79 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}\right)\left(2 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}\right)}{7.7 \times 10^6 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}}=\frac{18 \times 79 \times 1.6}{7.7} \times 10^{-16} \mathrm{~m}\)</p>
<p>r = 295.4 x 10<sup>-16</sup> = 29.54 m = 30 fm</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4977" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Atoms-Gold-Foil-Experiment-And-Angle-Of-Scattering.png" alt="Atoms Gold Foil Experiment And Angle Of Scattering" width="388" height="397" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Atoms-Gold-Foil-Experiment-And-Angle-Of-Scattering.png 388w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Atoms-Gold-Foil-Experiment-And-Angle-Of-Scattering-293x300.png 293w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 388px) 100vw, 388px" /></p>
<p>0 = Scattering angle</p>
<p>N= No. of α-Particles</p>
<p>The plot is Schematic and not according to scale.</p>
<p><strong>Question 13.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>state Bohr’s quantization condition for defining stationary orbits. How does de Broglie&#8217;s hypothesis explain the stationary orbits?</li>
<li>Find the relation between the three wavelengths λ<sub>1, </sub>λ<sub>2</sub>, <span style="font-size: inherit;">λ<sub>3</sub> and from the energy level diagram shown below.</span></li>
</ol>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4978" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Atoms-Three-Energy-Levels.png" alt="Atoms Three Energy Levels" width="369" height="285" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Atoms-Three-Energy-Levels.png 369w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Atoms-Three-Energy-Levels-300x232.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 369px) 100vw, 369px" /></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>1. Bohr&#8217;s quantization condition: The electron can revolve around the nucleus only in those circular orbits in which the angular momentum of an electron is an integral multiple of \(\frac{h}{2 \pi}\), where h is Planck&#8217;s constant. \(\mathrm{mvr}=n \frac{\mathrm{h}}{2 \pi}\) [m = mass, v = velocity of electron]</p>
<p>Their circular orbits are stationary, de Broglie hypothesis: de-Broglie interprets Bohr&#8217;s 2<sup>nd</sup> postulate in terms of the wave nature of the electron. According to him- The electron can revolve in certain stable orbits for which the angular momentum is some integral multiple of h/2π.</p>
<p>Mathematically, \(2 \pi r_n=\frac{n h}{m v}\)</p>
<p>Therefore, \(\mathrm{mvr}_{\mathrm{n}}=\frac{\mathrm{nh}}{2 \pi}\)</p>
<p>2. \(E_{C B}=\frac{h c}{\lambda_1} \Rightarrow E_{B A}=\frac{h c}{\lambda_2} \Rightarrow E_{C A}=\frac{h c}{\lambda_3}\)</p>
<p>here E<sub>CB</sub> = Energy gap between levels B and C</p>
<p>E<sub>CA</sub> = Energy gap between levels A and C</p>
<p>E<sub>BA</sub>= Energy gap between levels A and B</p>
<p>E<sub>CA</sub> = E<sub>CB</sub> + E<sub>BA</sub></p>
<p>∴ \(\frac{h c}{\lambda_3}=\frac{h c}{\lambda_1}+\frac{h c}{\lambda_2} \Rightarrow \frac{1}{\lambda_3}=\frac{1}{\lambda_1}+\frac{1}{\lambda_2} \Rightarrow \lambda_3=\frac{\lambda_1 \lambda_2}{\lambda_1+\lambda_2}\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 14. State Bohr&#8217;s postulate to explain stable orbits in a hydrogen atom. Prove that the speed with which the electron revolves in nlh orbit is proportional to (1/n).</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p><strong>Bohr&#8217;s postulate:</strong></p>
<p>Electron revolves around the nucleus in those orbits for which the angular momentum is an<br />
integral multiple of h/2π.</p>
<p>∴ \(\mathrm{mvr}=\frac{\mathrm{nh}}{2 \pi}\)</p>
<p><strong>Speed of e<sup>&#8211;</sup> in n<sup>th</sup> orbit</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4979" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Atoms-Speed-Of-Orbit.png" alt="Atoms Speed Of Orbit" width="288" height="297" /></p>
<p>For hydrogen radius of nth orbit is given by = \(r_n=\frac{\varepsilon_0 n^2 h^2}{\pi m c^2}\)</p>
<p>Form Bohr&#8217;s postulate</p>
<p>⇒ \(m v_n r_n=\frac{n h}{2 \pi}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(m v_n\left(\frac{\varepsilon_0 n^2 h^2}{\pi m e^2}\right)=\frac{n h}{2 \pi}\)</p>
<p>∴ \(\mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{n}}=\frac{\mathrm{c}^2}{2 \varepsilon_0 h n} \Rightarrow \mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{n}} \propto \frac{1}{\mathrm{n}}\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 15. A narrow beam of protons, each having 4.1 MeV energy is approaching a sheet of lead (Z = 82). Calculate :</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>The speed of a proton in the beam, and</li>
<li>The distance of its closest approach</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>Energy of proton = 4. 1 MeV, Z = 82</p>
<p>1. Speed of a proton</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{1}{2} m_p v_p^2=4.1 \times 10^6 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}\)</p>
<p>∴ \(v_p^2=\frac{2 \times 4.1 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-13}}{1.67 \times 10^{-27}}=7.85 \times 10^{14}\)</p>
<p>V<sub>p</sub> = 2.8 x 10<sup>7</sup> m/s</p>
<p>2. Distance of closest approach</p>
<p>⇒ \(K. E=\frac{k e(z e)}{r_0}\)</p>
<p>⇒\(r_0=\frac{K Z e^2}{r_0}=\frac{9 \times 10^{9} \times 82 \times\left(1.6 \times 10^{-19}\right)^2}{4.1 \times 10^6 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}}=288 \times 10^{-16}\)</p>
<p>∴r<sub>0</sub> = 2.9 x 10<sup>-14</sup> m<sup>-1</sup></p>
<h2>CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 12  Long Questions And Answers</h2>
<p><strong>Question 1.</strong> According to the third postulate of Bohr&#8217;s model, when an atom makes a transition from the higher energy stale with quantum number nj to the lower energy stale with quantum number n<sub>f</sub>(n<sub>f</sub> &lt;n<sub>i</sub>), the difference of the energy is carried away by the photon of frequency such that hv = En<sub>i</sub>-En<sub>f</sub>.</p>
<p>Since both ni and nf are integers, this immediately shows that in transitions between the different atomic levels, light is radiated in various discrete frequencies. For the hydrogen atom spectrum, the Balmcr formula corresponds to n<sub>f</sub> = 2 and n<sub>i</sub> = 3, 4, 5, etc. This result of Bohr&#8217;s model suggested the presence of other scries spectra for hydrogen atoms &#8211; those corresponding to the transitions resulting from n<sub>f</sub> = 1 and n<sub>i</sub> = 2, 3, etc: and n<sub>f</sub> = 3 and n<sub>i</sub> = 4, 5, etc., and so on. Such series were identified in the course of spectroscopic investigations and are known as the Lyman, Balmer, Paschen, Brackett, and Pfund series. The electronic transitions corresponding to this series are shown</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4980" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Atoms-Spectroscopic-Investigations.png" alt="Atoms Spectroscopic Investigations" width="439" height="406" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Atoms-Spectroscopic-Investigations.png 439w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Atoms-Spectroscopic-Investigations-300x277.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 439px) 100vw, 439px" /></p>
<p>(1). <strong>The total energy of an electron in an atom in an orbit is -3.4 eV. Its kinetic and potential energies are respectively</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>3.4 eV, 3.4 eV</li>
<li>-3.4 eV, -3.4 eV</li>
<li>-3.4eV,-6.8 eV</li>
<li>3.4 eV, -6.8 eV</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. 3.4 eV, -6.8 eV</p>
<p>(2). <strong>Given the value of the Rydberg constant is 10<sup>7</sup> m<sup>-1</sup>, the wave number of the last line of the Balmer series in the hydrogen spectrum will be</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>0.5 x 10<sup>7</sup> m<sup>-1</sup></li>
<li>0.25 x 10<sup>7</sup> m<sup>-1</sup></li>
<li>2.5 x 10<sup>7</sup> m<sup>-1</sup></li>
<li>0.025 x 10<sup>4</sup> m<sup>-1</sup></li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 2. 0.25 x 10<sup>7</sup> m<sup>-1</sup></p>
<p>(3). <strong>The ratio of the wavelength of the last line of Balmcr scries and the last line of the Lyman series</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>0.5</li>
<li>2</li>
<li>1</li>
<li>4</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. 1</p>
<p>(4). <strong>The wavelength of Balmer scries lies in</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Ultraviolet region</li>
<li>Infrared region</li>
<li>Far infra-red region</li>
<li>Visible region</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. Visible region</p>
<p><strong>Question 2.</strong> Neutrons mid protons tire identical particles in the sense that their masses are nearly the same and the force called nuclear force, does not distinguish between them, Nuclear force is the strongest force. The stability of the nucleus is determined by the neutron Proton ratio or mass defect or packing fraction, The Shape of the nucleus is calculated by quadruple moment and the spin of the nucleus depends on an even or odd mass number. The volume of the nucleus depends on the mass number. The whole mass of the atom (nearly 99%) is centered at the nucleus.</p>
<p>(1). <strong>The correct statement about the nuclear force is as follows:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Charge independent</li>
<li>Short range force</li>
<li>Nonconservative force</li>
<li>All of these</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. All of these</p>
<p>(2). <strong>The range of a nuclear force is the order of:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>2 x 10<sup>-10</sup> m</li>
<li>1.5 x 10<sup>-20</sup> m</li>
<li>1.2 x 10<sup>-4</sup>m</li>
<li>1.4 x 10<sup>-15</sup> m</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. 1.4 x 10<sup>-15</sup> m</p>
<p>(4). <strong>A force between two protons is the same as the force between a proton and a neutron. The nature of the force is:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Electrical force</li>
<li>Weak nuclear force</li>
<li>Gravitational force</li>
<li>Strong nuclear force</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. Electrical force</p>
<p>The post <a rel="nofollow" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics-chapter-12/">Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 12 Atoms</a> appeared first on <a rel="nofollow" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com">CBSE School Notes</a>.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
					<wfw:commentRss>https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics-chapter-12/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
			<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>Important Questions For CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 3 Current Electricity</title>
		<link>https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics-chapter-3/</link>
					<comments>https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics-chapter-3/#respond</comments>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[Kristensmith Taylor]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Wed, 22 May 2024 04:59:59 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[Class 12 Physics]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://cbseschoolnotes.com/?p=3862</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[<p>CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter-3 Current Electricity Multiple Choice Questions And Answers Question 1. In the circuit given below P≠R and the reading of the galvanometer is the same with switch S open or closed. Then: IQ=IR IR=IG IP=IG IQ+IG Answer: 4. IQ+IG Read and Learn More Important Questions for Class 12 Physics with Answers ... <a title="Important Questions For CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 3 Current Electricity" class="read-more" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics-chapter-3/" aria-label="More on Important Questions For CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 3 Current Electricity">Read more</a></p>
<p>The post <a rel="nofollow" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics-chapter-3/">Important Questions For CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 3 Current Electricity</a> appeared first on <a rel="nofollow" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com">CBSE School Notes</a>.</p>
]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<h2>CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter-3 Current Electricity Multiple Choice Questions And Answers</h2>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-6809" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Important-Questions-For-CBSE-Class-12-Physics-Chapter-3-Current-Electricity.png" alt="Important Questions For CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 3 Current Electricity" width="808" height="441" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Important-Questions-For-CBSE-Class-12-Physics-Chapter-3-Current-Electricity.png 808w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Important-Questions-For-CBSE-Class-12-Physics-Chapter-3-Current-Electricity-300x164.png 300w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Important-Questions-For-CBSE-Class-12-Physics-Chapter-3-Current-Electricity-768x419.png 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 808px) 100vw, 808px" /></p>
<p><strong>Question 1. In the circuit given below P≠R and the reading of the galvanometer is the same with switch S open or closed. Then:</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-3920" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-The-Circuit.png" alt="Current Electricity The Circuit" width="288" height="287" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-The-Circuit.png 288w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-The-Circuit-150x150.png 150w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 288px) 100vw, 288px" /></p>
<ol>
<li>I<sub>Q</sub>=I<sub>R</sub></li>
<li>I<sub>R</sub>=I<sub>G</sub></li>
<li>I<sub>P</sub>=I<sub>G</sub></li>
<li>I<sub>Q</sub>+I<sub>G</sub></li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. I<sub>Q</sub>+I<sub>G</sub></p>
<p><strong>Read and Learn More<a href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics/"> Important Questions for Class 12 Physics with Answers</a></strong></p>
<p><strong>Question 2. Two wires A and B of the same material having length in the ratio 1:2 and diameter in the ratio 2:3 are connected in series with a battery. The ratio of the potential differences (V<sub>A</sub>/V<sub>B</sub>) across the two wires respectively is:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>1/3</li>
<li>3/4</li>
<li>4/5</li>
<li>9/8</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. 9/8</p>
<p>In Series, I → Same.</p>
<p>V = IR</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{V_A}{V_B}=\frac{R_A}{R_B}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(R=\frac{\rho l}{A}=\frac{4 \rho l}{\pi d^2}\) [4, ρ, l, π &#8211; Constant]</p>
<p>∴ \(\frac{R_A}{R_B}=\frac{l_A}{l_B} \times\left(\frac{d B}{d A}\right)^2 = \frac{V_A}{V_{B}}=\frac{1}{2} \times\left(\frac{3}{2}\right)^2 = \frac{V_A}{V_{B}}=\frac{9}{8}\)</p>
<p><strong>CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter-3 Important Questions</strong></p>
<p><strong>Question 3. Infinity resistance in a resistance box has:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>A resistance of 105Ω</li>
<li>A resistance of 107Ω</li>
<li>A resistor of resistance</li>
<li>A gap only</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. A gap only</p>
<p><strong>Question 4. A battery of 15V and negligible internal resistance is connected across a 50Ω resistor. The amount of energy dissipated as heal to the resistor in one minute is:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>122 J</li>
<li>270 J</li>
<li>420 J</li>
<li>720 J</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 2. 270 J</p>
<p>Use \(H=\frac{V^2}{R} t\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 5. In a potentiometer experiment, the balancing length of a cell is 120cm. When the cell is shunted with a 1 Ω resistance, the balancing length becomes 40 cm. The internal resistance of the cell is:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>10Ω</li>
<li>7Ω</li>
<li>3Ω</li>
<li>2Ω</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. 2Ω</p>
<p><strong>Question 6. Two students A and B calculate the charge flowing through a circuit. A concludes that 300 C of charge flows in 1 minute. B concludes that 3.125 x 10<sup>19</sup> electrons flow in 1 second. If the current measured in the circuit is 5 A, then the correct calculation is done by:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>A</li>
<li>B</li>
<li>Both A and Both</li>
<li>Neither A nor Both</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. Both A and Both</p>
<p>⇒ \(I=\frac{q}{t}\) [for A]</p>
<p>∴ \(I=\frac{ne}{t}\) [for B]</p>
<p><strong>Question 7. The resistances of two wires having the same length and the same area of cross-section arc 2Ω and 8 Ω respectively. If the resistivity of 2Ω wire is 2.65 x 10<sup>-8</sup> m then the resistivity of 8Ω wire is:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>10.60 x 10<sup>-4</sup> Ω m</li>
<li>8.32 x 10<sup>-8</sup> Ω m</li>
<li>7.61 x 10<sup>-8</sup> Ωm</li>
<li>5.45 x 10<sup>-8</sup> Ω m</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. 10.60 x 10<sup>-4</sup> Ω m</p>
<p>Use \(R=\frac{\rho l}{A}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{\rho_2}{\rho_1}=\frac{R_2}{R_1}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\rho_2=\frac{8}{2} \times 2.65 \times 10^{-8}\)</p>
<p>∴ \(\rho_2=10.60 \times 10^{-8} \Omega \mathrm{m}\)</p>
<p><strong>CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter-3 Important Questions</strong></p>
<p><strong>Question 8. The given figure shows an I-V graph of a copper wire of length L and an area of cross-section A. The slope of the curve becomes</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-3921" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-The-Slope-Of-The-Curve.png" alt="Current Electricity The Slope Of The Curve" width="285" height="284" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-The-Slope-Of-The-Curve.png 285w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-The-Slope-Of-The-Curve-150x150.png 150w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 285px) 100vw, 285px" /></p>
<ol>
<li>Less if the length of the wire is increased</li>
<li>More if the length of the wire is increased</li>
<li>More if a wire of steel of the same dimension is used</li>
<li>If the temperature of the wire is increased</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. Less if the length of the wire is increased</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{I}{V}=\frac{1}{R}=\frac{A}{\rho l}\)</p>
<p>Slope = \(\frac{A}{\rho l}\)</p>
<p>l slope ↓</p>
<p><strong>Question 9. When a potential difference V is applied across a conductor at temperature T. the drift velocity of the electrons is proportional to</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>T</li>
<li>√T</li>
<li>V</li>
<li>√V</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. V</p>
<p>∴ \(v_d=\frac{c V}{m l} \bar{\tau}\)</p>
<p>∴ V<sub>d</sub> ∝ V</p>
<p><strong>Question 10. A cell supplies a current of 0.9 A through a 20 resistor and a current of 0.3 A through a 70 resistor. What is the internal resistance of cells?</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>0.5Ω</li>
<li>1.0Ω</li>
<li>1.2Ω</li>
<li>2.0Ω</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. 0.5Ω</p>
<p>E = I<sub>1</sub> (R<sub>1</sub> + r) ⇒ E = 0.9(2 + r) →(1)</p>
<p>E = I<sub>2</sub> (R<sub>2</sub> + r) ⇒ E = 0.3 (7 + r) →(2)</p>
<p>From equation (1) and (2)</p>
<p>0.9 (2 + r) = 0.3 (7 + r)</p>
<p>6 + 3r = 7 + r</p>
<p>2r = 1 ⇒ r = 0.5 Ω</p>
<p><strong>Question 11. At what temperature would the resistance of a copper conductor be double its resistance at 0°C? Given temperature coefficient of resistance for copper is 3.9 x 10<sup>-3</sup> °C<sup>-1</sup>.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>256.4°C</li>
<li>512.8°C</li>
<li>100°C</li>
<li>256.4 K</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. 256.4°C</p>
<p>R<sub>1</sub> = R<sub>0</sub> (1 +∝ t)</p>
<p>2R<sub>0</sub> = R<sub>0</sub>(1 + 3.9 x 10<sup>-3</sup> x t) ⇒ \(\mathrm{t}=\frac{2-1}{0.0039}\) = 256.4°C</p>
<p><strong>Question 12. A student is asked to connect four cells of emf e each and internal resistance r each in a series of helping conditions. By mistake, he oppositely connects one cell. What will be the effective EMF and effective internal resistance?</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>4ε, 2r</li>
<li>2ε, 4r</li>
<li>3ε, 2r</li>
<li>4ε, 4r</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 2. 2ε, 4r</p>
<p><strong>Question 13. In a hydrogen atom, the electron is moving in a circular orbit of radius 5.0 x 10<sup>-11</sup> m with a constant speed of 2 x 10<sup>6</sup> m/s. The electric current formed due to the motion of electrons is _______.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>1.12 A</li>
<li>1.02 A</li>
<li>1.02 mA</li>
<li>1.12 mA</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. 1.02 mA</p>
<p>∴\(I=\frac{e V}{2 \pi r} ⇒ \) \(I=\frac{1.6 \times 10^{-19} \times 2 \times 10^6}{2 \times 3.14 \times 5 \times 10^{11}} \mathrm{~A}\) ⇒ I = 1.02 mA</p>
<p><strong>CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter-3 Important Questions</strong></p>
<p><strong>Question 14. A voltmeter of very high resistance is joined in the circuit as shown in the figure. The voltage shown by the voltmeter will be _________.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-3922" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-The-Voltmeter.png" alt="Current Electricity The Voltmeter" width="368" height="284" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-The-Voltmeter.png 368w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-The-Voltmeter-300x232.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 368px) 100vw, 368px" /></p>
<ol>
<li>5 V</li>
<li>2.5 V</li>
<li>10 V</li>
<li>7.5 V</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. 5 V</p>
<p>⇒ \(I=\frac{10}{5+5}=1 \mathrm{~A}\)</p>
<p>∴ V = IR = 1 x 5 = 5V</p>
<p><strong>Question 15. The figure shows a part of a closed circuit. If the current flowing through it is 2A. What will be the potential difference between points B and A, V<sub>B</sub>&#8211; V<sub>A</sub> is:</strong></p>
<p>image</p>
<ol>
<li>+2V</li>
<li>+1 V</li>
<li>-1V</li>
<li>-2V</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. -2V</p>
<p>Apply KVL</p>
<p>image</p>
<p>⇒ \(2 \times \frac{1}{4}+1+2 \times \frac{1}{4}=V_A-V_B\)</p>
<p>⇒ 2 = V<sub>A</sub>-V<sub>B</sub></p>
<p>∴ V<sub>B</sub>-V<sub>A</sub> = -2V</p>
<p><strong>Question 16. If the current in an electric bulb increases by 2%. what will be the change in the power of a bulb? (Assume that the resistance of the filament of a bulb remains constant).</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Decreases by 2%</li>
<li>Decreases by 4%</li>
<li>Increases by 2%</li>
<li>Increases by 4%</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. Increases by 4%</p>
<p>P = I<sup>2</sup>R</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{P}}{\mathrm{P}} \times 100=2 \frac{\Delta \mathrm{I}}{\mathrm{I}} \times 100\), R constant</p>
<p>⇒ 2 x 2</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{\Delta P}{P} \times 100=4\)</p>
<p>So power will increase by 4%.</p>
<p><strong>Important Questions in Physics Class 12 &#8211; Current Electricity</strong></p>
<p><strong>Question 17. Two bulbs of 220 V and 100 W arc first connected in parallel and then in series with a supply of 220 V. Total power in both cases will be ______ respectively.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>100 W. 50 W</li>
<li>50 W. 100 W</li>
<li>200 W. 50 W</li>
<li>50 W. 200 W</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. 200 W. 50 W</p>
<p>In parallel → P = P<sub>1</sub> + P<sub>2</sub></p>
<p>P= 200 W</p>
<p>∴ Series \(\frac{1}{P}=\frac{1}{P_1}+\frac{1}{P_2}\)</p>
<p>So, P = 50 W</p>
<p><strong>Question 18. Kirchhoff&#8217;s junction rule represents ________.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Conservation of energy</li>
<li>Conservation of linear momentum</li>
<li>Conservation of angular momentum</li>
<li>Conservation of charge</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. Conservation of charge</p>
<p><strong>Question 19. The device has powder P and voltage &#8216;V&#8217;. The connecting wires from the power station to the device have a finite resistance RC. The power dissipated in the connecting wires PC.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>\(\frac{V^2 R_C}{P}\)</li>
<li>\(\frac{\mathrm{PR}_{\mathrm{C}}^2}{\mathrm{~V}}\)</li>
<li>\(\frac{P^2 R_C}{V^2}\)</li>
<li>\(\frac{V R_C}{P^2}\)</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. \(\frac{P^2 R_C}{V^2}\)</p>
<p>Current following</p>
<p>∴ \(I=\frac{P}{V}\)</p>
<p>So power loss across the wire, Pe = I<sup>2</sup>RC</p>
<p>∴ \(P_e=\frac{P^2 R_e}{V^2}\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 20. Dimension of mobility (μ) is _______.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>M<sup>-1</sup>T<sup>2</sup>A<sup>-1</sup></li>
<li>M<sup>1</sup>L<sup>3</sup>T<sup>-3</sup>A<sup>-2</sup></li>
<li>M<sup>1</sup>L<sup>3</sup>T<sup>-4</sup>A<sup>-1</sup></li>
<li>M<sup>1</sup>L<sup>4</sup>T<sup>-3</sup>A<sup>-1</sup></li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. M<sup>-1</sup>T<sup>2</sup>A<sup>-1</sup></p>
<h2>Important Questions in Physics Class 12 &#8211; Current Electricity Assertion And Reason</h2>
<p>For question numbers 1 to 4 two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct answer to these questions from the codes (1). (2). (3) and (4) as given below.</p>
<ol>
<li>Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A</li>
<li>Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A</li>
<li>A is true but R is false</li>
<li>A is false and R is also false</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Question 1. Assertion:</strong> The total current entering a circuit is equal to that leaving it by Kirchhoff&#8217;s law.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> It is based on the conservation of charge.</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A</p>
<p><strong>Question 2. Assertion: The terminal potential of a cell is always less than its emf</strong>.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> Potential drop due to internal resistance of cell increases the terminal potential difference.</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. A is false and R is also false</p>
<p><strong>Question 3. Assertion: The connecting wires are made of coppe</strong>r.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> The electrical conductivity of copper is high.</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A</p>
<p><strong>Question 4. Assertion</strong>: There is no current in the metal in the absence of an electric field.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> The motion of free electrons occurs randomly.</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A</p>
<h2>Class 12 Physics Current Electricity Short Answer Questions</h2>
<p><strong>Question 1. The variation of the drift velocity (v<sub>d</sub>) of electrons in two copper wires A and B of different lengths versus the potential difference (V) applied across their ends</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-3923" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-Variation-Of-Dift-Velocity.png" alt="Current Electricity Variation Of Dift Velocity" width="289" height="287" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-Variation-Of-Dift-Velocity.png 289w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-Variation-Of-Dift-Velocity-150x150.png 150w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 289px) 100vw, 289px" /></p>
<ol>
<li>What does the slope of the line represent?</li>
<li>Which one of the two wires is longer?</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>V<sub>d</sub> = μE, V = El</p>
<p>⇒ \(\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{d}}=\frac{\mu \mathrm{V}}{l}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(v_{\mathrm{d}}=\left(\frac{\mu}{l}\right) \mathrm{V}\)</p>
<p>compare with y = mx</p>
<ol>
<li>Slope = \(\) = mobility of charge carriers</li>
<li>For constant potential difference (V<sub>d</sub>)<sub>A</sub> &gt; (V<sub>d</sub>)<sub>B</sub></li>
</ol>
<p>That&#8217;s why B has a longer wire.</p>
<p><strong>Question 2. Two wires X and Y of the same material and equal lengths having areas of cross-section A and 2A respectively, are connected in parallel across an ideal battery of emf E. What is the ratio of current density (J<sub>X</sub>/J<sub>Y</sub>) in them?</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>⇒ \(J=\frac{I}{A}=\frac{E}{R A}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\mathrm{J}=\frac{\mathrm{E}}{\rho \ell} \times \frac{\mathrm{A}}{\mathrm{A}}\) (\(\mathrm{R}=\frac{\rho \mathrm{l}}{\mathrm{A}}\))</p>
<p>∴ \(J=\frac{E}{\rho l}\)</p>
<p>So, for both wires, E, ρ, and l are the same</p>
<p>∴ \(\frac{\mathrm{J}_x}{\mathrm{~J}_y}=1: 1\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 3. When 5V potential difference is applied across a wire of length 0. 1 m. the drift speed of electrons is 2.5 x 10<sup>-4</sup> m/s. If the electron density in the wire is 8 x 10<sup>28</sup>m<sup>-3</sup> calculate the resistivity of the material of the wire.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p><strong>Given:</strong> V = 5V</p>
<p>Length of wire l = 0.1m</p>
<p>v<sub>d</sub> = 2.5 x 10<sup>-4</sup> m/s</p>
<p>Electron density n = 8 x 10<sup>28</sup> m<sup>-3</sup></p>
<p>We know the drift velocity and current are related by the formula</p>
<p>i = ne A v<sub>d</sub> → (1)</p>
<p>Where n is the electron density, and e is the charge on an electron. A is an area of the cross-section and v<sub>d</sub> is drift velocity.</p>
<p>Also, i = V/R and R = ρl/A where p is resistivity. l is the length of the conductor</p>
<p>so, i = VA/ρl → (2)</p>
<p>comparing equation (1) and (2) we get.</p>
<p>VA / ρl = ne A V<sub>d</sub></p>
<p>or ρ = V / ne l v<sub>d</sub></p>
<p>Put values of all.</p>
<p>ρ = 5/0.1 x 8 x 10<sup>28</sup> x 1.6 x 10<sup>-19</sup> x 2.5 x 10<sup>-4</sup></p>
<p>ρ = 1.56 x l0<sup>-5</sup> ohm-meter</p>
<p><strong>Question 4. A battery of emf 12 V and internal resistance 2 Ω is connected to a 4 Ω resistor as shown in the figure.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Show that a voltmeter when placed across the cell and the resistor, in turn, gives the same reading.</li>
<li>To record the circuit&#8217;s voltage and current, why is the voltmeter placed in parallel and the ammeter in series in the circuit?</li>
</ol>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-3924" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-A-Battery.png" alt="Current Electricity A Battery" width="319" height="312" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-A-Battery.png 319w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-A-Battery-300x293.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 319px) 100vw, 319px" /></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>1. <strong>When the voltmeter is connected across the cell</strong></p>
<p>I = E/(R + r ) = 12 /(2 + 4) = 12/6 = 2 A</p>
<p>V<sub>1</sub>= E-Ir = 12- (2 x 2 ) = 8 V</p>
<p><strong>When the voltmeter is connected across the resistor</strong></p>
<p>V<sub>2</sub> = ER /(r + R) = ( 12 x 4)/(4 + 2) = 12 x 4/6 = 8 V</p>
<p>So, v<sub>1</sub> = v<sub>2</sub></p>
<p>2. A Voltmeter is used to measure the potential difference across two points in a circuit since the voltage in the branches remains the same in a parallel connection. also the resistance of the voltmeter is very high due to which a very small current flows through the voltmeter so it is connected in parallel to measure the voltage.</p>
<p>An ammeter is used to measure the current flowing through a component/circuit. Since the current remains the same in series connections and also the resistance of an ammeter is very small it doesn’t affect the current to be measured. So an ammeter is connected in series to measure current.</p>
<p><strong>Question 5. Two cells of EMFs 1.5 V and 2.0 V having internal resistance 0.2 Ω. and 0.3 Ω respectively are connected in parallel. Calculate the cnif and internal resistance of the equivalent cell.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-3926" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-Two-Cells.png" alt="Current Electricity Two Cells" width="290" height="275" /></p>
<p>Given E<sub>1</sub> = 1.5 V and r<sub>1</sub> = 0.2 Ω</p>
<p>E<sub>2</sub> = 2 V and r<sub>2</sub> = 0.3 Ω</p>
<p>Equivalent emf = \(\frac{E_1 r_2+E_2 r_1}{r_1+r_2}=\frac{1.5 \times 0.3+2 \times 0.2}{0.5}=\frac{0.85}{0.5}=1.7 \mathrm{~V}\)</p>
<p>∴ Equivalent resistance = \(\frac{r_1 r_2}{r_1+r_2}=\frac{0.2 \times 0.3}{0.2+0.3}=\frac{0.06}{0.5}=0.12 \Omega\)</p>
<p>r<sub>eq</sub>, = 0.12 Ω</p>
<p><strong>Question 6.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li><strong>Define the term ‘relaxation time&#8217; in a conductor.</strong></li>
<li><strong>Define the mobility of a charge carrier. What is its relation with relaxation lime?</strong></li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Relaxation time is the average time interval between two successive collisions of an electron in a conductor when current flows.</li>
<li>Mobility of a charge carrier is defined as the drift velocity of the charge carrier per unit electric field i.e μ = v<sub>d</sub>/E = eτ/m</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Question 7. A metal rod of square cross-sectional area A having length ( has current 1 flowing through it and a potential difference of V volt is applied across its ends. Now the rod is cut parallel to its length into two identical pieces and joined as shown in Figure 2, What potential difference must be maintained across the length 2l so that the current in the rod is still 1?</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-3928" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-A-Metal-Rod-Of-Square-Cross-Sectional-Area.png" alt="Current Electricity A Metal Rod Of Square Cross Sectional Area" width="564" height="150" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-A-Metal-Rod-Of-Square-Cross-Sectional-Area.png 564w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-A-Metal-Rod-Of-Square-Cross-Sectional-Area-300x80.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 564px) 100vw, 564px" /></p>
<p>As, \(V=I R=\frac{I_\rho l}{A}\)</p>
<p>Now, \(\frac{V_{\text {new }}}{V}=\frac{l_{\text {new }}}{A_{\text {new }}} \times \frac{A}{l}=\frac{2}{1/2}\) OR V<sub>new</sub> = 4V</p>
<p>Now 4V potential difference must be maintained across the length 2l to maintain the same current in the rod.</p>
<p><strong>Question 8. Two wires one of copper and the other of manganin have the same resistance and equal length. Which wire is thicker and why?</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>Manganin is an alloy of Cu with manganese and nickel. Since manganese and nickel have a resistivity greater than copper, pure copper has lower resistivity as compared to alloy manganin. For the same resistance and equal length, manganin wire is thicker than copper.</p>
<p>∴ \(R=\rho \frac{l}{A} \Rightarrow \rho=\frac{R A}{l}\) (∵ \(\rho \propto A\))</p>
<p><strong>Question 9. The plot of the variation of potential difference across a combination of three identical cells in series, versus current is shown below. What is the emf and internal resistance of each cell?</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-3929" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-Three-Identical-Cells-In-Series.png" alt="Current Electricity Three Identical Cells In Series" width="347" height="288" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-Three-Identical-Cells-In-Series.png 347w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-Three-Identical-Cells-In-Series-300x249.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 347px) 100vw, 347px" /></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>V = Terminal voltage across cell combination</p>
<p>The terminal voltage across a cell can be obtained by subtracting the potential drop across the internal resistance of the cell from the emf of the cell.</p>
<p>V = E &#8211; IR</p>
<p>When I = 0, = V = E</p>
<p>From graph it is found that when I = 0, V = 6V ⇒ E = 6V</p>
<p>As I = 1A, V = 0 from graph</p>
<p>As V = E-Ir ⇒ 0 = 6-1.r =&gt; 6 = 1.r</p>
<p>r = 6 Ω</p>
<p>As 3 identical cells are connected in series so EMF and internal resistance of each cell are 2V and 2 Ω respectively.</p>
<p><strong>Question 10.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Derive an expression for the drift velocity of free electrons.</li>
<li>How does the drift velocity of electrons in a metallic conductor vary with an increase in temperature? Explain.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>1. Drift velocity is defined as the average velocity with which free electrons in a conductor drift in a direction opposite to the direction of the applied electric field. When a conductor is subjected to an electric field E. each electron experiences a force.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-3931" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-Drift-Velocity-Of-Free-Electrons.png" alt="Current Electricity Drift Velocity Of Free Electrons" width="341" height="289" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-Drift-Velocity-Of-Free-Electrons.png 341w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-Drift-Velocity-Of-Free-Electrons-300x254.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 341px) 100vw, 341px" /></p>
<p>⇒ \(\vec{F}=-\mathrm{e} \vec{E}\)</p>
<p>and acquires an acceleration</p>
<p>⇒ \(\mathrm{a}=\frac{\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}}{\mathrm{m}}=\frac{-\mathrm{e} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{E}}}{\mathrm{m}}\) → (1)</p>
<p>Here m = mass of the electron, e = charge. E = electric field. The average time difference between two consecutive collisions is known as the relaxation time of an electron.</p>
<p>⇒ \(\tau=\frac{\tau_1+\tau_2+\ldots \ldots+\tau_n}{n}\) → (2)</p>
<p>As v = u + at (from equations of motion)</p>
<p>The drift velocity v<sub>d</sub> is defined as</p>
<p>⇒ \(\vec{v}_{\mathrm{d}}=\frac{\vec{v}_1+\vec{v}_2+\ldots+\vec{v}_n}{n}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{\mathrm{d}}=\frac{\left(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}}_1+\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}}_2+\ldots .+\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}}_{\mathrm{n}}\right)+\mathrm{a}\left(\tau_1+\tau_2+\ldots .+\tau_{\mathrm{n}}\right)}{\mathrm{n}}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\vec{v}_d=0+\frac{a\left(\tau_1+\tau_2+\ldots .+\tau_n\right)}{n}\)</p>
<p>(∵ average thermal velocity = 0)</p>
<p>∴ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{\mathrm{d}}=0+\mathrm{at}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{\mathrm{d}}=-\left(\frac{\mathrm{e} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{E}}}{\mathrm{m}}\right) \tau\) ⇒ (\(\left|\vec{v}_{\mathrm{d}}\right|=\left(\frac{e \tau}{m}\right) \vec{E}\))</p>
<p>2. According to the drift velocity expression, relaxation time is the time interval between successive collisions of an electron. On increasing temperature, the electrons move faster and more collisions occur more quickly. Hence, relaxation lime decreases with an increase in temperature which implies that drift velocity also decreases with temperature.</p>
<p><strong>Question 11. Two identical cells of cmf 1.5 V each joined in parallel to supply energy to an external circuit consisting of two resistances of 7 Ω each joined in parallel. A very high resistance voltmeter reads the terminal voltage of cells to be 1.4 V. Calculate the internal resistance of each cell.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>A high resistance voltmeter means that no current flows through the voltmeter (practically very little current). When two batteries are connected in parallel, then</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-3932" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-High-Resistance-Voltmeter.png" alt="Current Electricity High Resistance Voltmeter" width="293" height="373" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-High-Resistance-Voltmeter.png 293w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-High-Resistance-Voltmeter-236x300.png 236w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 293px) 100vw, 293px" /></p>
<p>⇒ \(E_{eq}=\frac{E_1 r_2+E_2 r_1}{r_1+r_2}\)</p>
<p>Here r<sub>1</sub> = r<sub>2</sub> = r</p>
<p>E<sub>1</sub> = E<sub>2</sub> = I.5V (given)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{eq}}=\frac{1.5 \times \mathrm{r}+1.5 \times \mathrm{r}}{2 \mathrm{r}}\)</p>
<p>E<sub>eq</sub> = 1.5 V</p>
<p>Now \(\left.\begin{array}{l}<br />
\mathrm{R}_1=7 \Omega \mathrm{R}_2=7 \Omega<br />
\end{array}\right] \text { given }\)</p>
<p>So \(\frac{1}{R_{\mathrm{eq}}}=\left(\frac{1}{7}+\frac{1}{7}\right) \Omega\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{eq}}=\frac{7}{2}=3.5 \Omega\)</p>
<p>∵ \(I=\frac{\text { terminal voltage }}{\text { equivalent resistance }}\)</p>
<p>V = terminal voltage = 1.4 (given) = voltmeter reading</p>
<p>So, \(I=\frac{1.4}{3.5}=0.4 \mathrm{~A}\)</p>
<p>Now V = E<sub>eq</sub>&#8211; 1 x r<sub>eq</sub> ⇒ 1.4= 1.5- 0.4 x r<sub>eq</sub></p>
<p>0.4 x r<sub>eq</sub> = 0.1</p>
<p>As r<sub>eq</sub> = r/2 (∵ \(\frac{1}{r_{e q}}=\frac{1}{r}+\frac{1}{r}\))</p>
<p>So r of each cell = 0.5Ω</p>
<p><strong>Question 12.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Define the term &#8216;conductivity&#8217; of a metallic wire. Write it&#8217;s ST unit.</li>
<li>Using the concept of free electrons in a conductor, derive the expression for the conductivity of a wire in terms of number density and relaxation lime. Hence obtain the relation between current density and the applied electric field \(\vec{E}\).</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>1. The conductivity of a material equals the reciprocal of the resistance of its wire of unit length and unit area of cross-section.</p>
<p><strong>Alternatively:</strong></p>
<p>The conductivity (σ) of a material is the reciprocal of its resistivity (ρ)</p>
<p>(Also acept \(\sigma=\frac{1}{\rho}\))</p>
<p>Its SI Units (\(\frac{1}{\text { olnm-metrc }}\)) or hom<sup>-1</sup>m<sup>-1</sup> or (mho m<sup>-1</sup>) or sciemen m<sup>-1</sup>.</p>
<p>2. The Acceleration, \(\vec{a}=-\frac{e}{m} \vec{E}\)</p>
<p>The average drift velocity, V<sub>d</sub>, is given by \(\vec{v}_{\mathrm{d}}=-\frac{\mathrm{e} \vec{\mathrm{E}}}{\mathrm{m}} \tau\)</p>
<p>(τ = average time between collisions or average relaxation lime)</p>
<p>If n is the number of free electrons per unit volume, then-current I is given by</p>
<p>⇒ \(I=n e A\left|v_d\right|\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(I=n e A\left(\frac{e \tau}{m}\right) E = I=\left(\frac{n e^2 \tau}{m}\right) E A\) (\(v_{\mathrm{d}}=\left(\frac{\mathrm{e} \tau}{\mathrm{m}}\right) \mathrm{E}\))</p>
<p>But I = J A (J = current density)</p>
<p>We, therefore, get</p>
<p>⇒ \(\mathrm{J}=\frac{\mathrm{ne}^2}{\mathrm{~m}} \tau \mathrm{E}\), The term \(\frac{n e^2}{m} \tau\) is conductivity.</p>
<p>∴ \(\sigma=\frac{\mathrm{ne}^2 \tau}{\mathrm{m}}\) ⇒ J = σE</p>
<p><strong>Question 13.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-3933" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-Kirchhoffs-Rules.png" alt="Current Electricity Kirchhoff's Rules" width="384" height="297" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-Kirchhoffs-Rules.png 384w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-Kirchhoffs-Rules-300x232.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 384px) 100vw, 384px" /></p>
<p><strong>Use Kirchhoff’s rules, to calculate the current in the arm AC of the given circuit.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>Applying Kirchhoff&#8217;s junction rule at node A</p>
<p>I<sub>3</sub> = I<sub>1</sub>+I<sub>2</sub> → (1)</p>
<p>Applying Kirchhoff’s KVL in loop EFCAE</p>
<p>-30 I<sub>1</sub>+40-40 I<sub>3</sub> = 0</p>
<p>3 I<sub>1</sub>+4 I<sub>3</sub> = 4 → (2)</p>
<p>Applying KVL in loop EFDBE</p>
<p>-30 I<sub>1</sub>+20 I<sub>2 </sub>&#8211; 80 = 0</p>
<p>-3 I<sub>1</sub> + 2 I<sub>2</sub> = 8 → (3)</p>
<p>from eq (1) we put the value of I<sub>3</sub> in eq (2)</p>
<p>3 I<sub>1</sub> +4(I<sub>1</sub> + I<sub>2</sub>) = 4</p>
<p>7 I<sub>1</sub> +4 I<sub>2</sub> = 4 → (4)</p>
<p>from eq (3) and (4) we get</p>
<p>I<sub>1</sub> =-12/13 A</p>
<p>Putting I<sub>1</sub> in eq (4) we get</p>
<p>⇒ \(\mathrm{I}_2=\frac{34}{13} \mathrm{~A}\)</p>
<p>Then form eq(1) we get \(\mathrm{I}_3=\frac{22}{13} \mathrm{~A}\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 14.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li><strong>The potential difference applied across a given resistor is altered so that the heat produced per second increases by a factor of 9. By what factor does the applied potential difference change?</strong></li>
<li><strong>In the figure shown, an ammeter A and a resistor of 4 Ω are connected to the terminals of the source. The emf of the source is 12 V having an internal resistance of 2 Ω. Calculate the voltmeter and ammeter readings.</strong></li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>1. \(\mathrm{H}=\frac{\mathrm{V}^2}{\mathrm{R}} \mathrm{t}\) (initially) →(1)</p>
<p>After altering potential differences, we can write,</p>
<p>⇒ \(H^{\prime}=\frac{V^{\prime 2}}{R} t\)</p>
<p>∵ H’ = 9H we get,</p>
<p>⇒ \(9 \mathrm{H}=\frac{\mathrm{V}^{\prime 2}}{\mathrm{R}} \mathrm{t}\) → (2)</p>
<p>Solving (1) and (2) we get, V&#8217; = 3V</p>
<p>2. <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-3934" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-Voltmeter-And-Ammeter.png" alt="Current Electricity Voltmeter And Ammeter" width="374" height="286" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-Voltmeter-And-Ammeter.png 374w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-Voltmeter-And-Ammeter-300x229.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 374px) 100vw, 374px" /></p>
<p>Total current &#8216;I&#8217; in the circuit, \(I=\frac{E}{R+r}=\frac{R}{4+2}=2 A\)</p>
<p>Now potential differences across batteries is</p>
<p>V + Ir = E</p>
<p>V + 2 x 2 = 12</p>
<p>∴ V = 8 Volt</p>
<h2>Class 12 Physics Current Electricity Long Answer Questions</h2>
<p><strong>Question 1. Wheatstone bridge is an arrangement of four resistances P, Q, R, and S connected as shown in the figure. Their values are so adjusted that the galvanometer G shows no deflection. The bridge is then said to be balanced when this condition is achieved. In the setup shown here, points B and D are at the same potential and it can be shown that P/Q = R/S This is called the balancing condition. If any three resistances are known, the fourth can be found. The practical form of the Wheatstone Bridge is a slide wire bridge or Meter Bridge. Using this the unknown resistance can be determined as \(S=\left(\frac{100-\ell}{\ell}\right) \times R\), where l is the balancing length of the meter bridge.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-3936" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-Wheatstone-Bridge.png" alt="Current Electricity Wheatstone Bridge" width="296" height="350" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-Wheatstone-Bridge.png 296w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-Wheatstone-Bridge-254x300.png 254w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 296px) 100vw, 296px" /></p>
<p>(1). <strong>In a Wheatstone bridge circuit, P = 5 Ohm, Q = 6 Ohm, R = 10 Ohm and S = 5 Ohm. What is the value of additional resistance to be used in series with S, so that the bridge is balanced?</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>9 Ohm</li>
<li>7 Ohm</li>
<li>10 Ohm</li>
<li>5 Ohm</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 2. 7 Ohm</p>
<p>(2). <strong>A Wheatstone bridge consisting of four arms of resistance P, Q, R, S is most sensitive when</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>All the resistance is equal</li>
<li>All the resistance is unequal</li>
<li>The resistance P and Q arc equal but R&gt;&gt;P and S&gt;&gt;Q</li>
<li>The resistance P and Q are equal but R&lt;&lt;P and S&lt;&lt;Q</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. All the resistance is equal</p>
<p>(3). <strong>The percentage error in measuring resistance with a meter bridge can be minimized by adjusting the balancing point close to</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>0</li>
<li>20 cm</li>
<li>50 cm</li>
<li>80 cm</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. 50 cm</p>
<p>(4). <strong>In the meter bridge experiment, the ratio of the resistance of the left and light gap is 2 : 3. The balance point from the left is</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>20 cm</li>
<li>50 cm</li>
<li>40 cm</li>
<li>60 cm</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. 40 cm</p>
<p>2. <strong>Relation between V, E, and r of a cell</strong></p>
<p>Emf of a cell is the potential difference between two electrodes of the cell when no current is drawn from the cell. Internal resistance is the resistance offered by the electrolyte of a cell when the electric current flows through it. The internal resistance of a cell depends upon the following factors:</p>
<ol>
<li>Distance between the electrodes</li>
<li>Nature and temperature of the electrolyte</li>
<li>Nature of electrodes</li>
<li>Area of electrodes.</li>
</ol>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-3937" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-Two-Electrodes-Of-The-Cell.png" alt="Current Electricity Two Electrodes Of The Cell" width="360" height="278" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-Two-Electrodes-Of-The-Cell.png 360w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-Two-Electrodes-Of-The-Cell-300x232.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 360px) 100vw, 360px" /></p>
<p>For a freshly prepared cell, the value of internal resistance is generally low and goes on increasing as the cell is put to more use. The potential difference between the two electrodes of a cell in a closed circuit is called terminal potential difference and its value is less than the emf of the cell during discharging and more than the emf of the cell during charging of the cell in a closed circuit. It can be written as V = E &#8211; Ir or V = E + Ir</p>
<p>(1). <strong>The terminal potential difference of two electrodes of a cell is equal to cmf  the cell when</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>1 ≠ 0</li>
<li>1 = 0</li>
<li>Both (1) and (2)</li>
<li>Neither (1) and (2)</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 2. Both (1) and (2)</p>
<p>(2). <strong>A cell of cmf E and internal resistance r gives a current of 0.5 A with an external resistance of 12 Ohm and a current of 0.25 A with an external resistance of 25 Ohm. What is the value of the internal resistance of the cell?</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>5 Ohm</li>
<li>1 Ohm</li>
<li>7 Ohm</li>
<li>3 Ohm</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 2. 1 Ohm</p>
<p>(3). <strong>If external resistance connected to a cell has been, increased to 5 times, the potential difference across the terminals of the cell increases from 10 V to 30 V. Then the cmf of the cell is</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>30 V</li>
<li>60 V</li>
<li>50 V</li>
<li>40 V</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 60 V</p>
<p>(4). <strong>During the charging of the cell the correct relation is</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>E = V + Ir</li>
<li>E = V &#8211; Ir</li>
<li>V = E + Ir</li>
<li>V = E &#8211; Ir</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. V = E + Ir</p>
<p>3. <strong>A battery is a combination of two or more cells. In the following figure, a single battery is represented in which two cells of emf ε<sub>1</sub>, and ε<sub>2</sub>, and internal resistance r<sub>1</sub> and r<sub>2</sub> respectively are connected.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-3938" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-A-Battery-Is-A-Combination-Of-Two-Or-More-Cells.png" alt="Current Electricity A Battery Is A Combination Of Two Or More Cells" width="439" height="287" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-A-Battery-Is-A-Combination-Of-Two-Or-More-Cells.png 439w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-A-Battery-Is-A-Combination-Of-Two-Or-More-Cells-300x196.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 439px) 100vw, 439px" /></p>
<p><strong>Answer the following Questions:</strong></p>
<p>(1). <strong>The equivalent emf of this combination is:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>\(\frac{\varepsilon_1 r_1+\varepsilon_2 r_2}{r_1+r_2}\)</li>
<li>\(\frac{\varepsilon_1 r_1-\varepsilon_2 r_2}{r_1+r_2}\)</li>
<li>\(\frac{\varepsilon_1 r_2-\varepsilon_2 r_1}{r_1+r_2}\)</li>
<li>\(\varepsilon_1-\varepsilon_2\)</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. \(\frac{\varepsilon_1 r_2-\varepsilon_2 r_1}{r_1+r_2}\)</p>
<p>(2). <strong>For terminalB to be negative:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>\(\varepsilon_1 r_2&gt;\varepsilon_2 r_1\)</li>
<li>\(\varepsilon_1 r_2&lt;\varepsilon_2 r_1\)</li>
<li>\(\varepsilon_1 r_1&gt;\varepsilon_2 r_2\)</li>
<li>\(\varepsilon_2 r_2=\varepsilon_1 r_1\)</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 2. \(\varepsilon_1 r_2&lt;\varepsilon_2 r_1\)</p>
<p>(3). <strong>The current in the internal circuit is</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>\(\frac{\varepsilon_1+\varepsilon_2}{r_1+r_2}\)</li>
<li>\(\frac{\varepsilon_1-\varepsilon_2}{r_1+r_2}\)</li>
<li>\(\frac{\varepsilon_1}{r_1}-\frac{\varepsilon_2}{r_2}\)</li>
<li>\(\frac{\varepsilon_1}{r_2}-\frac{\varepsilon_2}{r_1}\)</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. \(\frac{\varepsilon_1+\varepsilon_2}{r_1+r_2}\)</p>
<p>(4). T<strong>he equivalent internal resistance of the combination is:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>\(\frac{r_1+r_2}{r_1 r_2}\)</li>
<li>\(r_1+r_2\)</li>
<li>\(\frac{r_1 r_2}{r_1+r_2}\)</li>
<li>\(r_1-r_2\)</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. \(\frac{r_1 r_2}{r_1+r_2}\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 4.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Define the term drift velocity.</li>
<li>Based on electron drift, derive an expression for the resistivity of a conductor in terms of the number density of free electrons and relaxation lime. On what factors do the resistivity of a conductor depend?</li>
<li>Why are alloys like Constantan and manganin arc used for making standard resistors?</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>1. Drift velocity is defined as the average velocity with which the electrons drift towards the positive terminal under the effect of the applied electric field.</p>
<p>2. We know that the current flowing through the conductor is:</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-3939" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-Resistivity-Of-A-Conductor.png" alt="Current Electricity Resistivity Of A Conductor" width="328" height="290" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-Resistivity-Of-A-Conductor.png 328w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-Resistivity-Of-A-Conductor-300x265.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 328px) 100vw, 328px" /></p>
<p>I = n A e v<sub>d</sub></p>
<p>∴ \(\mathrm{l}=\mathrm{neA}\left(\frac{\mathrm{eE \tau}}{\mathrm{m}}\right)\)</p>
<p>Using \(E=\frac{V}{l}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(I=n e A\left(\frac{e V}{m l}\right) \tau=\left(\frac{n e^2 A \tau}{m /}\right) V=\frac{1}{R} V\)</p>
<p>I ∝ V → which is Ohm&#8217;s law</p>
<p>Where \(R=\frac{m l}{n A e^2 \tau}\) is constant for a particular temperature and is called the resistance of the conductor.</p>
<p>∴ \(R=\left(\frac{m}{n e^2 \tau}\right) \frac{l}{A}=\frac{\rho l}{A} \Rightarrow \rho=\left(\frac{m}{n e^2 \tau}\right)\)</p>
<p>Where ρ is the specific resistance or resistivity of the material of the wire. It depends on the number of free electrons per unit volume and temperature</p>
<p>3. Alloys like constantan and manganin are used for making standard resistors, because:</p>
<ul>
<li>They have a high value of resistivity and</li>
<li>The temperature coefficient of resistance is negligible</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Question 5.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Plot a graph showing the variation of voltage v/s the current drawn from the cell. How can one get information from this plot about the cmf of the cell and its internal resistance?</li>
<li>Two cells of cmf&#8217;s E<sub>1</sub>, and E<sub>2</sub>, and internal resistance r<sub>1</sub>, and r<sub>2</sub> arc connected in parallel. Obtain the expression for the emf and internal resistance of a single equivalent cell that can replace this combination.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>1. The terminal potential difference across the cell,</p>
<p>V = E &#8211; Ir or V = &#8211; rl + E</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-3940" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-Terminal-Potential.png" alt="Current Electricity Terminal Potential" width="289" height="342" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-Terminal-Potential.png 289w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-Terminal-Potential-254x300.png 254w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 289px) 100vw, 289px" /></p>
<p>Comparing the above relation with the equation of a straight line i.e. y = mx + c, it follows that the graph between (along the x-axis) and V (along the y-axis) will be a straight line having a slope equal to -r and making intercept equal to E on the y-axis. Thus we get information about the EMF of the cell and its internal resistance from this plot.</p>
<p>2. <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-3941" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-Single-Equivalent-Cell.png" alt="Current Electricity Single Equivalent Cell" width="700" height="290" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-Single-Equivalent-Cell.png 700w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Current-Electricity-Single-Equivalent-Cell-300x124.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 700px) 100vw, 700px" /></p>
<p>I = I<sub>1</sub> + I<sub>2</sub> → (1)</p>
<p>v = V<sub>B1</sub>-V<sub>B2</sub></p>
<p>V = Polcnlial difference across terminal B<sub>1</sub> and B<sub>2</sub></p>
<p>V = E<sub>1</sub> &#8211; I<sub>1</sub>r<sub>1</sub> &#8211; for first cell</p>
<p>V = E<sub>2</sub> &#8211; I<sub>2</sub>r<sub>2</sub> &#8211; for second cell</p>
<p>and I = I<sub>1</sub> + I<sub>2</sub> as per above eq(1)</p>
<p>So \(I=\frac{E_1-V}{r_1}+\frac{E_2-V}{r_2}=\left(\frac{E_1}{r_1}+\frac{E_2}{r_2}\right)-V\left(\frac{1}{r_1}+\frac{1}{r_2}\right)\) → (2)</p>
<p>\(I=\frac{E_{eq .}-V}{r_{eq .}}\) → (3)</p>
<p>By equation (2) and (3)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{E_{eq .}-V}{r_{eq .}}=\left(\frac{E_1}{r_1}+\frac{E_2}{r_2}\right)-V\left(\frac{1}{r_1}+\frac{1}{r_2}\right)\)</p>
<p>Now, \(\frac{1}{r_{eq}}=\frac{1}{r_1}+\frac{1}{r_2}\) and \(\frac{E_{eq}}{r_{eq}}=\frac{E_1}{r_1}+\frac{E_2}{r_2}\)</p>
<p>∴ \(E_{eq}=\frac{E_1 r_2+E_2 r_1}{r_1+r_2}\) and \(r_{eq}=\frac{r_1 r_2}{r_1+r_2}\)</p>
<p>The post <a rel="nofollow" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics-chapter-3/">Important Questions For CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 3 Current Electricity</a> appeared first on <a rel="nofollow" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com">CBSE School Notes</a>.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
					<wfw:commentRss>https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics-chapter-3/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
			<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism</title>
		<link>https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics-chapter-4/</link>
					<comments>https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics-chapter-4/#respond</comments>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[Kristensmith Taylor]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Wed, 22 May 2024 04:58:00 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[Class 12 Physics]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://cbseschoolnotes.com/?p=4284</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[<p>CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 4 Moving Charges And Magnetism Multiple Choice Question And Answers Question 1. The moving coil galvanometer G1 and G2 have the following particulars respectively: N1 = 30 , A1 = 3.6 x 10-3m2 , B1 = 0.25 T N2 = 42 , A2 = 1.8 x 10-3m2, B2 = 0.50 ... <a title="Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism" class="read-more" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics-chapter-4/" aria-label="More on Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism">Read more</a></p>
<p>The post <a rel="nofollow" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics-chapter-4/">Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism</a> appeared first on <a rel="nofollow" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com">CBSE School Notes</a>.</p>
]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<h2>CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 4 Moving Charges And Magnetism Multiple Choice Question And Answers</h2>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-6811" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Important-Questions-for-CBSE-Class-12-Physics-Chapter-4-Moving-Charges-and-Magnetism.png" alt="Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism" width="846" height="385" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Important-Questions-for-CBSE-Class-12-Physics-Chapter-4-Moving-Charges-and-Magnetism.png 846w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Important-Questions-for-CBSE-Class-12-Physics-Chapter-4-Moving-Charges-and-Magnetism-300x137.png 300w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Important-Questions-for-CBSE-Class-12-Physics-Chapter-4-Moving-Charges-and-Magnetism-768x350.png 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 846px) 100vw, 846px" /></p>
<p><strong>Question 1. The moving coil galvanometer G<sub>1</sub> and G<sub>2</sub> have the following particulars respectively:</strong></p>
<p>N<sub>1</sub> = 30 , A<sub>1</sub> = 3.6 x 10<sup>-3</sup>m<sup>2</sup> , B<sub>1</sub> = 0.25 T</p>
<p>N<sub>2</sub> = 42 , A<sub>2</sub> = 1.8 x 10<sup>-3</sup>m<sup>2</sup>, B<sub>2</sub> = 0.50 T</p>
<p><strong>The spring constant is the same for both the galvanometers, The ratio of current sensitivities of G<sub>1</sub> and G<sub>2</sub> is:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>5:7</li>
<li>7:5</li>
<li>1:4</li>
<li>1:1</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. 5:7</p>
<p><strong>Read and Learn More<a href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics/"> Important Questions for Class 12 Physics with Answers</a></strong></p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{\mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{S}_1}}{\mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{S}_2}}=\frac{\mathrm{N}_1 \mathrm{~A}_1 \mathrm{~B}_1}{\mathrm{~K}_1} \times \frac{\mathrm{K}_2}{\mathrm{~N}_2 \mathrm{~A}_2 \mathrm{~B}_2}\)</p>
<p>K<sub>1</sub> = K<sub>2</sub></p>
<p>So \(\left(\frac{N_1}{N_2}\right)\left(\frac{A_1}{A_2}\right)\left(\frac{B_1}{B_2}\right)\)</p>
<p>= \(\frac{30}{42} \times \frac{3.6 \times 10^{-3}}{1.8 \times 10^{-3}} \times \frac{0.25}{0.50}\)</p>
<p>= \(\frac{5}{7} \times 2 \times \frac{1}{2}\)</p>
<p>= 5:7</p>
<p><strong>CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 4 Question 2. A current 1 is flowing through the loop as shown in the figure ( MA = R, MB = 2R ). The magnetic field at the center of the loop is \(\left(\frac{\mu_0 I}{R}\right)\) times:</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4389" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-A-Current-Flowing-Through-The-Loop.png" alt="Moving Charges And Magnetism A Current Flowing Through The Loop" width="285" height="335" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-A-Current-Flowing-Through-The-Loop.png 285w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-A-Current-Flowing-Through-The-Loop-255x300.png 255w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 285px) 100vw, 285px" /></p>
<ol>
<li>\(\frac{5}{16}\) in to the plane of paper</li>
<li>\(\frac{5}{16}\) Out to the plane of paper</li>
<li>\(\frac{7}{16}\) in to the plane of paper</li>
<li>\(\frac{7}{16}\) out to the plane of paper</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. \(\frac{7}{16}\) out to the plane of paper</p>
<p>B = B<sub>DA</sub>(x)+B<sub>AC</sub>(x)</p>
<p>= \(\frac{3}{4} \times \frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{I}}{2 \mathrm{R}}+\frac{1}{4} \times \frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{I}}{2(2 \mathrm{R})}\)</p>
<p>= \(\frac{3}{8} \frac{\mu_0 I}{R}+\frac{1}{16} \frac{\mu_0 I}{R}\)</p>
<p>= \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{I}}{\mathrm{R}}\left(\frac{3}{8}+\frac{1}{16}\right)\)</p>
<p>= \(\frac{\mu_0 I}{R}\left(\frac{6+1}{16}\right)\)</p>
<p>B = \(\frac{7}{16} \frac{\mu_0 I}{R}\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 3. A long straight wire in the horizontal plane carries a current of 15A in north to south direction. The magnitude and direction of the magnetic field at a point 2.5 m east of the wire respectively are:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>1.2 μT, vertically upward</li>
<li>1.2 μT, vertically downward</li>
<li>0.6 μT, vertically upward</li>
<li>0.6 μT vertically downward</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. 1.2 μT, vertically upward</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4394" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-A-Long-Stright-Wire.png" alt="Moving Charges And Magnetism A Long Stright Wire" width="304" height="321" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-A-Long-Stright-Wire.png 304w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-A-Long-Stright-Wire-284x300.png 284w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 304px) 100vw, 304px" /></p>
<p>B = \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{I}}{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}=\frac{4 \pi \times 10^{-7} \times 15}{2 \pi \times 2.5}=1.2 \mu \mathrm{T}\) (Vertically upwards)</p>
<p><strong>CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 4 Question 4. An electron is projected with velocity \(\vec{V}\) along the axis of a current carrying a long solenoid. Which of the following statements is true?</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>The path of the electron will be circular about the axis</li>
<li>The electron will be accelerated along the axis</li>
<li>The path of the electron will be helical</li>
<li>The electron will continue to move at the same velocity v along the axis of the solenoid.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. The electron will continue to move at the same velocity v along the axis of the solenoid.</p>
<p><strong>Question 5. If the speed v of a charged particle moving in a magnetic field \(\vec{B}\) (\(\vec{v}\) is perpendicular to \(\vec{B}\)) is halved, then the radius of its path will:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Not change</li>
<li>Become two times</li>
<li>Become one-fourth</li>
<li>Become half</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. Become half</p>
<p>∴ \(r=\frac{m v}{q B}\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 6. Which of the following is not affected by the presence of a magnetic field?</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>A current-carrying conductor</li>
<li>A moving charge</li>
<li>A stationary charge</li>
<li>A rectangular current loop with its plane parallel to the field</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. A stationary charge</p>
<p><strong>Question 7. Identical thick wires and two identical thin wires, all of the same material and the same length form a square in three different ways P, Q, and R as shown. Due to the current in these loops, the magnetic field at the center of the loop will be zero with ease of</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4396" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Identical-Thick-Wires-And-Identical-thin-Wires.png" alt="Moving Charges And Magnetism Identical Thick Wires And Identical thin Wires" width="490" height="182" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Identical-Thick-Wires-And-Identical-thin-Wires.png 490w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Identical-Thick-Wires-And-Identical-thin-Wires-300x111.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 490px) 100vw, 490px" /></p>
<ol>
<li>P and R only</li>
<li>Q and R only</li>
<li>P and Q only</li>
<li>P, Q, and R</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. P and R only</p>
<p>Question 8. A circular coil carrying a certain current produces a magnetic field B<sub>0</sub> at its center. The coil is now rewound to have three turns and the same current is passed through it. The magnetic field at the center is</p>
<ol>
<li>3B<sub>0</sub></li>
<li>\(\frac{B_0}{3}\)</li>
<li>\(\frac{B_0}{9}\)</li>
<li>9B<sub>0</sub></li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. 9B<sub>0</sub></p>
<p>Lel coil is of N turns and radius R, \(B_0=\frac{\mu_0 I}{2 R}\)</p>
<p>2πR = length of wire</p>
<p>Now, 2R = 3 x 2πR&#8217;</p>
<p>So, \(R^{\prime}=\frac{R}{3}\)</p>
<p>∴ \(B^{\prime}=\frac{\mu_0 I \times 3}{2\left(\frac{R}{3}\right)}=9\left(\frac{\mu_0 I}{2 R}\right)=9 B_0\)</p>
<p><strong>CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 4Question 9. A long solenoid carrying current produces a magnetic field B along its axis, if the number of turns in the solenoid is halved and the current in it is doubled, the new magnetic field will be:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>B/2</li>
<li>B/2</li>
<li>2B</li>
<li>4B</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 2. B/2</p>
<p>⇒ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}=\mathrm{q}(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}})\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}=1.6 \times 10^{-19}[(4 \hat{\mathrm{i}}+3 \hat{\mathrm{k}}) \times(3 \hat{\mathrm{k}}+4 \hat{\mathrm{i}})]\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\left|\begin{array}{ccc}<br />
\hat{i} &amp; \hat{j} &amp; \hat{k} \\<br />
4 &amp; 0 &amp; 3 \\<br />
4 &amp; 0 &amp; 3<br />
\end{array}\right|\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\hat{\mathrm{i}}(0)-\hat{\mathrm{j}}(12-12)+\hat{\mathrm{k}}(0)\)</p>
<p>= 0</p>
<p>So, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}=0\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 10. A current-carrying square loop is suspended in a uniform magnetic field acting in the plane of the loop. If the force on one arm of the loop is F, the net force on the remaining three arms of the loop will be:-</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>\(3{\vec{F}}\)</li>
<li>\(-3{\vec{F}}\)</li>
<li>\({\vec{F}}\)</li>
<li>\(-\vec{F}\)</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. \(-\vec{F}\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 11. The electron performs circular motion in a circle of radius r, perpendicular to a uniform magnetic field B. The kinetic energy gained by this electron in half the revolution is __________.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>\(\frac{1}{2} m v^2\)</li>
<li>\(\frac{1}{4} m v^2\)</li>
<li>Zero</li>
<li>πrBeV</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. Zero</p>
<p>Work done is zone</p>
<p>Because v ⊥ B</p>
<p>So ΔK = W = 0.</p>
<p><strong>Question 12. At a place, an electric field and a magnetic field are in a downward direction. There an electron moves in a downward direction. Hence this electron.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Will bend towards left</li>
<li>Will bend towards the right</li>
<li>Will gain velocity</li>
<li>Will lose velocity</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. Will lose velocity</p>
<p><strong>Question 13. When a charged particle moves in a magnetic field its kinetic energy.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Remains Constant</li>
<li>Increases</li>
<li>Can decrease</li>
<li>Become zero</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. Remains Constant</p>
<p><strong>Question 14. A charged particle moves with velocity v in a uniform magnetic field B. The magnetic force acting on it will be maximum when.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>\(\vec{V}\) and \(\vec{B}\) arc in same direction.</li>
<li>\(\vec{V}\) and \(\vec{B}\) are in opposite direction.</li>
<li>\(\vec{V}\) and \(\vec{B}\) are mutually perpendicular.</li>
<li>\(\vec{V}\) and \(\vec{B}\) make an angle of 45° with each other.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. \(\vec{V}\) and \(\vec{B}\) are mutually perpendicular.</p>
<p><strong>Question 15. There are 100 turns per cm length in a very long solenoid. It carries a current of 2.5 A. The magnetic field at its center on the axis is __________ T.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>3.14 x 10<sup>-2</sup></li>
<li>9.42 x 10<sup>-2</sup></li>
<li>6.28 x 10<sup>-2</sup></li>
<li>12.56 x 10<sup>-2</sup></li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. 3.14 x 10<sup>-2</sup></p>
<p>B = μ<sub>0</sub> nI</p>
<p>⇒ \(4 \times 3.14 \times \frac{100}{10^{-2}} \times 2.5 \times 10^{-7}\)</p>
<p>⇒ 3.14 x 10<sup>-2</sup>T</p>
<p><strong>Question 16. A toroid wound with 100 turns per m of wire carries a current of 3 A. The core of the toroid is made of iron having relative magnetic permeability μ<sub>r</sub> = 5000. The magnetic field inside the iron is __________. (μ<sub>0 </sub>= 4π x 10<sup>-7 </sup>T mA<sup>-1</sup>)</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>0.15 T</li>
<li>1.5 x 10<sup>-2</sup>T</li>
<li>0.47 T</li>
<li>1.88 T</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. 1.88 T</p>
<p>B = μ<sub>0</sub> nI</p>
<p>= 5000 x 4 x 3.14 x 10<sup>-7</sup> x 100 x 3</p>
<p>B = 1.88 T</p>
<p><strong>Question 17. Two parallel long thin wires, each carrying current I are kept at a separation r from each other. Hence the magnitude of force per unit length of one wire due to the other wire is _________.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>\(\frac{\mu_0 I^2}{2 \pi r}\)</li>
<li>\(\frac{\mu_0 I^2}{r^2}\)</li>
<li>\(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{I}}{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}\)</li>
<li>\(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{I}}{2 \pi \mathrm{r}^2}\)</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. \(\frac{\mu_0 I^2}{2 \pi r}\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 18. Two concentric rings are kept in the same plane. The number of turns in both rings is 25. Their radii are 50 cm and 200 cm and they carry electric currents of 0.1 A and 0.2 A respectively, in mutually opposite directions. The magnitude of the magnetic field produced at their center is __________T.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>2μ<sub>0</sub></li>
<li>4μ<sub>0</sub></li>
<li>\(\frac{10}{4} \mu_0\)</li>
<li>\(\frac{5}{4} \mu_0\)</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. \(\frac{5}{4} \mu_0\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}_1+\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}_2\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{\mu_0 N_1 I_1}{2 R_1}-\frac{\mu_0 N_2 I_2}{2 R_2}=\frac{\mu_0 \times 25}{2}\left(\frac{0.1}{0.5}-\frac{0.2}{2}\right)=\frac{5}{4} \mu_0\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 19. The current sensitivity of the galvanometer is inversely proportional to _________.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Torsional constant</li>
<li>Number of turns</li>
<li>Area</li>
<li>Magnetic field</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. Torsional constant</p>
<p><strong>Question 20. Parallel currents ______ and antiparallel currents _______.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Attract, Attract</li>
<li>Repel, attract</li>
<li>Attract, repel</li>
<li>Repel, repel</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. Attract, repel</p>
<p><strong>Question 21. A solenoid of length 0.5 m has a radius of 1 cm and it is made up of 500 turns. If the magnitude of the magnetic field inside the solenoid is 6.28 x 10<sup>-3</sup> T then it carries a current of _________ A.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>4</li>
<li>5</li>
<li>2</li>
<li>10</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 2. 5</p>
<p>B = μ<sub>0</sub>nI</p>
<p>Solve I</p>
<p>I = \(\frac{\mathrm{B}}{\mu_{\mathrm{o}} \mathrm{n}}\left[\mathrm{n}=\frac{\mathrm{N}}{\ell}=\frac{500}{0.5}=1000 \text { turns } / \mathrm{m}\right]\)</p>
<p>∴ \(\frac{6.28 \times 10^{-3}}{4 \pi \times 10^{-7} \times 1000}=5 \mathrm{~A}\)</p>
<h2>Moving Charges And Magnetism Assertion And Reason</h2>
<p>For question numbers 1 to 7 two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct answer to these questions from the codes (1). (2). (3) and (4) as given below.</p>
<ol>
<li>Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A</li>
<li>Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A</li>
<li>A is true but R is false</li>
<li>A is false and R is also false</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Question 1. Assertion:</strong> When a charged particle moves with velocity v in a magnetic field B (v⊥B). the force on the particle does not work.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> The magnetic force is perpendicular to the velocity of the particle.</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A</p>
<p><strong>Question 2. Assertion:</strong> The magnetic moment of the toroid is zero.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> The magnetic field outside the volume of the carrying toroid is zero.</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 2. Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A</p>
<p><strong>Question 3. Assertion:</strong> Two charge particles at rest experience only electrostatic force.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> Charges at rest can only produce an electrostatic field.</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A</p>
<p><strong>Question 4. Assertion:</strong> A moving charged particle gets energy from a magnetic field.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> Magnetic force works on moving charged particles.</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. A is false and R is also false</p>
<p><strong>Question 5. Assertion:</strong> The coil is wound over the metallic frame in a moving coil galvanometer.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> The metallic frame helps in making steady deflection without any oscillation.</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A</p>
<p><strong>Question 6. Assertion:</strong> When the magnet is brought near iron nails, only translatory force acts on it.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> The field due to a magnet is generally uniform.</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. A is false and R is also false</p>
<p><strong>Question 7. Assertion:</strong> The higher the range of an ammeter, the smaller its resistance.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> To increase the range of the ammeter, the additional shunt needed to be connected across it.</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A.</p>
<h2>Moving Charges And Magnetism Short Question And Answers</h2>
<p><strong>Question 1.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Write the relation for the force acting on a charged particle q moving with velocity \(\vec{v}\) in the presence of a magnetic field \(\vec{B}\).</li>
<li>A proton is accelerated through a potential difference V, subjected to a uniform magnetic Held acting normal to the velocity of the proton. If the potential difference is doubled, how will the radius of the circular path described by the proton in the magnetic field change?</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>1. \(\vec{F}=q(\vec{v} \times \vec{B})\)</p>
<p>2. \(r=\frac{m v}{q B}=\frac{\sqrt{2 m(K E)}}{q B}\) [mv = P = \(\sqrt{2 \mathrm{mK}}\)] (K → K.E)</p>
<p>= \(\frac{\sqrt{2 m(q V)}}{q B} r \propto \sqrt{V}\)</p>
<p>Thus if V<sub>2</sub> = 2V<sub>1</sub> = r<sub>2</sub> = √2r<sub>1</sub>.</p>
<p><strong>Question 2. In the figure given below, wire PQ is fixed while the square loop ABCD is free to move under the influence of currents flowing in them. State with reason, in which direction does the loop begin to move or rotate?</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4397" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-A-Wire-Is-Fixed-While-The-Square-Loop.png" alt="Moving Charges And Magnetism A Wire Is Fixed While The Square Loop" width="333" height="366" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-A-Wire-Is-Fixed-While-The-Square-Loop.png 333w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-A-Wire-Is-Fixed-While-The-Square-Loop-273x300.png 273w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 333px) 100vw, 333px" /></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>Forces on side AB and CD cancel each other, Now force on AD is attractive due to the similar direction of current, and on side BC force is repulsive due to the opposite direction of current.</p>
<p>As side AD is nearer to wire PQ as compared to BC so force on side AD (attractive) is more than the force on side BC ( repulsive), so square loop ABCD does move towards wire PQ.</p>
<p><strong>Question 3.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>A proton and an electron traveling along parallel paths enter a region of uniform magnetic field, acting perpendicular to their paths. Which of them will move in a circular path with higher frequency?</li>
<li>What can be the cause of the helical motion of a charged particle?</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>1. We know that, frequency</p>
<p>&#x200d; \(v=\frac{\mathrm{q} B}{2 \pi \mathrm{m}} \text { and } \mathrm{m}_{\mathrm{e}}&lt;&lt;\mathrm{m}_{\mathrm{p}}\)</p>
<p>So electrons will move with a higher frequency</p>
<p>2. When a charged particle moves in a uniform external magnetic field, with velocity not perpendicular or parallel to the magnetic field, (Means : 0° &lt; θ &lt; 90°) then the charged particle experiences a force also along with torque and performs the helical motion.</p>
<p><strong>Question 4. Draw the magnetic field lines due to a current passing through a long solenoid.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4398" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-magnetic-Field-Lines-Due-To-A-Current-Passing-through-A-Long-Solenoid.png" alt="Moving Charges And Magnetism magnetic Field Lines Due To A Current Passing through A Long Solenoid" width="732" height="254" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-magnetic-Field-Lines-Due-To-A-Current-Passing-through-A-Long-Solenoid.png 732w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-magnetic-Field-Lines-Due-To-A-Current-Passing-through-A-Long-Solenoid-300x104.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 732px) 100vw, 732px" /></p>
<p><strong>Question 5. Find the condition under which the charged particles moving with different speeds in the presence of electric and magnetic field vectors can be used to select charged particles of a particular speed.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>Consider a charge ’q&#8217; moving with velocity \(\vec{v}\) in the presence of both electric field \(\vec{E}\) and magnetic field \(\vec{B}\) experience a force given as</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4400" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Electric-Field-Vectors-Can-Be-Used-To-Selected-Particles.png" alt="Moving Charges And Magnetism Electric Field Vectors Can Be Used To Selected Particles" width="310" height="340" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Electric-Field-Vectors-Can-Be-Used-To-Selected-Particles.png 310w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Electric-Field-Vectors-Can-Be-Used-To-Selected-Particles-274x300.png 274w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 310px) 100vw, 310px" /></p>
<p>⇒\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}=\mathrm{q}(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{E}}+\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}})=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{E}+\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{B}}\)</p>
<p>Assume, that \(\vec{E}\) and \(\vec{B}\) are ⊥ to each other and also to the velocity of the particle.</p>
<p>Directions of electric force \(\left(\vec{F}_{E}\right)\) and magnetic force \(\left(\vec{F}_{B}\right)\) are just opposite.</p>
<p>∴ \(\vec{F}=q(E-v B) \hat{j}\)</p>
<p>if magnitudes of electric and magnetic force are equal then, the net force on the particle is zero and it will move undeflected in the fields.</p>
<p>qE = qvB or V = E/B</p>
<p>The above condition is used to select charged particles of a particular velocity.</p>
<p><strong>Question 6.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Write the expression for the magnitude of the magnetic force acting on a charged particle moving with velocity v in the presence of magnetic field B.</li>
<li>A neutron, an electron, and an alpha particle moving with equal velocities enter a uniform magnetic field going into the plane of the paper as shown. Trace their paths in the field and justify your answer.</li>
</ol>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4401" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Equal-Velocities.png" alt="Moving Charges And Magnetism Equal Velocities" width="397" height="287" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Equal-Velocities.png 397w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Equal-Velocities-300x217.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 397px) 100vw, 397px" /></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>1. Force acting on a charged particle q which is moving with velocity v in magnetic field B is given by \(\vec{F}=q(\vec{v} \times \vec{B})\)</p>
<p>Fleming&#8217;s left-hand rule gives the direction of the force. The direction of the force is perpendicular to the plane containing velocity \(\vec{v}\) and magnetic field \(\vec{B}\).</p>
<p>2. A charged particle experiences a force when it enters the magnetic field. Due to the presence of a magnetic field, the charged particle will move in a circular path because the force is perpendicular to the velocity of the charged particle, required centripetal force will be provided by magnetic force.</p>
<p>The radius of the circular path in which the charged particle is moving is &#8220;given by r = mv/qB since v and B are constant so the radius of the path of the particle is proportional to their mass to charge ratio.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4403" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Magnetic-Forces.png" alt="Moving Charges And Magnetism Magnetic Forces" width="380" height="297" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Magnetic-Forces.png 380w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Magnetic-Forces-300x234.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 380px) 100vw, 380px" /></p>
<p>Alpha-particle will trace a circular path in an anti-clockwise sense and its deviation will be in the direction of \((\vec{v} \times \vec{B})\)</p>
<p>Nculion will pass without any deviation as the magnetic field does not exert force on the neutral particle.</p>
<p>Electron will trace a circular path in a clockwise sense as its deviation is in the direction opposite to \((\vec{v} \times \vec{B})\) with a smaller radius due to mass or charge.</p>
<p><strong>Question 7. Two long straight parallel conductors are carrying steady current I<sub>1</sub> and I<sub>2</sub> separated by a distance d. if the currents are flowing in the same direction, show how the magnetic field set up in one produces an attractive force on the other. Obtain the expression for this force. Hence define one ampere.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>We consider two long conductors X<sub>1</sub> Y<sub>1</sub> and X<sub>2</sub>Y<sub>2</sub> placed parallel to each other at a distance of d apart. The current I<sub>1</sub> and I<sub>2</sub> are flowing as shown in the diagram. The magnetic field at point P (on the conductor X<sub>1</sub>Y<sub>1</sub> due to current I<sub>2</sub> flowing through the long conductor X<sub>2</sub>Y<sub>2</sub>) is g given by</p>
<p>⇒ \(\mathrm{B}_2=\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{I}_2}{2 \pi \mathrm{d}}\) →(1)</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4404" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Two-Long-Stright-Parallel-Conductors.png" alt="Moving Charges And Magnetism Two Long Straight Parallel Conductors" width="331" height="328" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Two-Long-Stright-Parallel-Conductors.png 331w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Two-Long-Stright-Parallel-Conductors-300x297.png 300w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Two-Long-Stright-Parallel-Conductors-150x150.png 150w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 331px) 100vw, 331px" /></p>
<p>According to the right-hand rule, the direction of the magnetic field B<sub>2</sub> at point P is perpendicular to the plane of the paper and in an inward direction. Now, the conductor X<sub>1</sub> Y<sub>1</sub> carrying current I<sub>1</sub> lies in the magnetic field B, produced by the conductor X<sub>2</sub>Y<sub>2</sub>.</p>
<p>Since F=BIl, the force experienced by the unit length of the conductor X<sub>1</sub>Y<sub>1</sub> due to magnetic field B<sub>2</sub> is given by</p>
<p>⇒ \(\mathrm{F}=\mathrm{B}_2 \cdot\left(\mathrm{I}_1 \cdot \ell\right)=\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{I}_1 \mathrm{I}_2}{2 \pi \mathrm{d}}\) → (2)</p>
<p>or</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{F}{l}=\frac{\mu_0 I_1 I_2}{2 \pi d}\)</p>
<p>Applying Fleming&#8217;s left-hand rule, it follows that the force F on the conductor X<sub>1</sub>Y<sub>1</sub> acts in the plane of the paper and towards the left. If we proceed similarly then it can be proved that the conductor X<sub>2</sub>Y<sub>2</sub> experiences an equal force in the plane of the paper but towards the right.</p>
<p>Therefore, the two parallel conductors carrying current in the same direction attract each other.</p>
<p><strong>Definition of Ampere:</strong> Let I<sub>1</sub> = I<sub>2</sub> = I A and d = 1 m</p>
<p>Then from eq (1), we have that</p>
<p>F = 2x 10<sup>-7</sup> N/mK</p>
<p>This means that one ampere of current is that much current which when flown through two infinitely long parallel conductors separated by one meter in free space, causes a force of 2 x 10<sup>-7</sup> N per meter on each conductor.</p>
<p><strong>Question 8. A rectangular coil of sides &#8216;l&#8217; and ‘b’ carrying a current I is subjected to a uniform magnetic field \(\vec{B}\) acting perpendicular to its plane. Obtain the expression for the torque acting on it.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>Consider a rectangular conducting loop (PQRS) of length l and b breadth b placed in a uniform magnetic field. Let I be the current flowing in the loop in a clockwise direction. Let at any instant the angle between the magnetic field and normal to the rectangular coil is θ.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4406" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-A-Rectangular-Coil.png" alt="Moving Charges And Magnetism A Rectangular Coil" width="353" height="392" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-A-Rectangular-Coil.png 353w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-A-Rectangular-Coil-270x300.png 270w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 353px) 100vw, 353px" /></p>
<p>Force acting on the ann PQ in the loop,</p>
<p>⇒ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_1=\mathrm{I}(\vec{\ell} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}) \Rightarrow \mathrm{F}_1=\mathrm{IB} \ell\) (Directed inside the sheet of paper)</p>
<p>Similarly, the force acting on the arm RS of the loop,</p>
<p>⇒ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_2=\mathrm{I}(\vec{\ell} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}) \Rightarrow \mathrm{F}_2=\mathrm{IB} \ell\) (Directed outside the sheet of paper)</p>
<p>Force \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_3\) acting on the arm QR and force \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_4\) acting on the arm SP of the loop are equal, opposite and act along the same line, hence they cancel each other. Therefore only two forces \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_1\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_2\) act on the loop. \(\) and form a couple and try to rotate the loop clockwise. The magnitude of the torque(τ) due to forces \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_1\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_2\) is given by</p>
<p>τ = Magnitude ol the either force x Perpendicular distance between forces</p>
<p>τ = IlB x b sin θ { l x b = A, area of the loop}</p>
<p>r = I A B sinθ</p>
<p>In vector form \(\vec{\tau}=I(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}})\)</p>
<p>If the loop has N turns, then the net torque acting on the loop is</p>
<p>τ = BINA sinθ</p>
<p>τ = M B sinθ</p>
<p>∴ \(\vec{\tau}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{M}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\)</p>
<p><strong>CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 4 Question 9. How is a galvanometer converted into a voltmeter and an ammeter? Draw the relevant diagrams and find the resistance of the arrangement in each case. Take the resistance of the galvanometer as G.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p><strong>Conversion of Galvanometer into Voltmeter:</strong></p>
<p>Voltmeter is used to measure p.d. so it is connected in parallel, in a circuit and its resistance should be infinite in the ideal case, thus to maximize the resistance of the galvanometer according to the required range we connect a suitable resistance in series as shown:</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4407" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Galvanometer-Into-Voltmeter.png" alt="Moving Charges And Magnetism Galvanometer Into Voltmeter" width="331" height="312" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Galvanometer-Into-Voltmeter.png 331w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Galvanometer-Into-Voltmeter-300x283.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 331px) 100vw, 331px" /></p>
<p>If the potential difference between the points to be measured = V and if</p>
<p>the galvanometer gives full-scale deflection when current &#8220;Ig&#8221; passes through it. Then.</p>
<p>⇒ \(V=I_g\left(R_g+R_X\right) \Rightarrow V=I_g R_g+I_g R_X \Rightarrow V-I_g R_g=I_g R_X\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(R_X=\left(V-I_g R_g\right) / I_g\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(R_x=\frac{V}{I_g}-R_g\)</p>
<p>Also, the equivalent resistance of the voltmeter: R<sub>v</sub> = R<sub>x</sub> + R<sub>g</sub></p>
<p><strong>Conversion of Galvanometer into Anrmeter:</strong></p>
<p>An ammeter is a current measuring device so its resistance should be zero in the ideal case, thus to minimize its resistance according to the required range, we connect a suitable resistance in parallel with it, which is called a shunt: \(I_S=\left(I-I_g\right)\)</p>
<p>The potential difference across the shunt: \(V_g=I_g R_g\)</p>
<p>But \(V_S=\left(I-I_g\right) R_S\)</p>
<p>V<sub>s</sub> = V<sub>g</sub> [in parallel combination]</p>
<p>⇒  \(\mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{S}}\left(\mathrm{I}-\mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{g}}\right)=\mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{g}} \mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{g}}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(R_S=\frac{I_g}{I-I_g} R_g\)</p>
<p>Thus equivalent resistance \(G^{\prime}=\frac{R_g \cdot R_S}{R_g+R_S}\)</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4409" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Galvanometer-Into-Ammeter.png" alt="Moving Charges And Magnetism Galvanometer Into Ammeter" width="300" height="309" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Galvanometer-Into-Ammeter.png 300w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Galvanometer-Into-Ammeter-291x300.png 291w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 300px) 100vw, 300px" /></p>
<p><strong>Question 10.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>State Biot &#8211; Savart law and express this law in the vector form.</li>
<li>Two identical circular coils, P and Q each of radius R. carrying currents I A and √3A respectively, are placed concentric and perpendicular to each other lying in the XY and YZ planes. Find the magnitude and direction of the net magnetic field at the center of the coils.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>1. <strong>Biot-Savart Law (BSL)</strong></p>
<p>According to the Biot Savart Law, the magnitude of a magnetic field \(\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) is proportional to the current I. the element length \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{dl}}\) and inversely proportional to the square of the distance r. Its direction is perpendicular to the plane containing \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{dl}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}\).</p>
<p><strong>The field at point P due to the current element</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4410" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Field-At-Point-Due-To-Current-Element.png" alt="Moving Charges And Magnetism Field At Point Due To Current Element" width="300" height="332" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Field-At-Point-Due-To-Current-Element.png 300w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Field-At-Point-Due-To-Current-Element-271x300.png 271w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 300px) 100vw, 300px" /></p>
<p>⇒ \(\mathrm{dB}=\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \frac{\mathrm{Id} \ell \sin \theta}{\mathrm{r}^2}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi}=10^{-7} \mathrm{Tm} / \mathrm{A}\)</p>
<p>μ<sub>0</sub>= permeability of free space (air/vacuum)</p>
<p>Vector form:</p>
\(\mathrm{d} \vec{B}=\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \frac{I \vec{dl}\times \hat{\mathrm{r}}}{\mathrm{r}^2}=\frac{\mu_0}{4 \pi} \frac{I \vec{dl}\times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}}{\mathrm{r}^3}\)
<p>2. <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4411" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Two-Identical-Circular-Coils.png" alt="Moving Charges And Magnetism Two Identical Circular Coils" width="550" height="290" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Two-Identical-Circular-Coils.png 550w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Two-Identical-Circular-Coils-300x158.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 550px) 100vw, 550px" /></p>
<p>Given</p>
<p>I<sub>1</sub> = I A (current in coil P) : I<sub>2</sub> = √3 A (current in coil Q)</p>
<p>The magnetic field at the center of the circular current-carrying coil is given by</p>
<p>B = μ<sub>0 </sub>I/2R</p>
<p>So, \(B_p=\frac{\mu_0 I}{2 R}=\frac{\mu_0}{2 R}\)</p>
<p>∴ \(\mathrm{B}_{\mathrm{Q}}=\frac{\sqrt{3} \mu_0}{2 \mathrm{R}}\)</p>
<p>net field at centre(B<sub>R</sub>)</p>
<p>⇒ \(B_R=\sqrt{B_p^2+B_Q^2}=\sqrt{\left(\frac{\mu_0}{2 R}\right)^2+\left(\frac{\sqrt{3} \mu_0}{2 R}\right)^2}\)</p>
<p>So, \(B_R=\frac{\mu_0}{R}\), Direction \(\tan \theta=\frac{\mathrm{B}_{\mathrm{p}}}{\mathrm{B}_{\mathrm{Q}}}=\frac{1}{\sqrt{3}}\)</p>
<p>θ = 30°</p>
<p><strong>Question 11.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>State Ampere’s circuital law.</li>
<li>Use this law to find the magnetic field due to a straight infinite current-carrying wire.</li>
<li>How are the magnetic field lines different from the electrostatic field lines?</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>1. <strong>Ampere’s circuital law:</strong> The line integral of the magnetic field over a closed loop is p0 times the total current threading through that loop</p>
<p>⇒ \(\oint \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}} \cdot \mathrm{d} \vec{l}=\mu_0(\Sigma \mathrm{I})\)</p>
<p>2. <strong>Magnetic field due to infinitely long straight current carrying conductor:</strong></p>
<p>Apply Ampere&#8217;s law to find out the magnetic field at point ’p’</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4413" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Infinitely-Long-Striaght-Current-Carrying-Conductor.png" alt="Moving Charges And Magnetism Infinitely Long Straight Current Carrying Conductor" width="351" height="303" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Infinitely-Long-Striaght-Current-Carrying-Conductor.png 351w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Infinitely-Long-Striaght-Current-Carrying-Conductor-300x259.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 351px) 100vw, 351px" /></p>
<p>⇒ \(\oint \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}} \cdot \mathrm{d} \vec{l}=\mu_0 \Sigma \mathrm{I}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\oint \mathrm{Bd} l \cos \theta=\mu_0 \mathrm{I} \quad\left\{\begin{array}{c}<br />
\theta=0^{\circ} \\<br />
\cos \theta=1 \\<br />
\Sigma \mathrm{I}=\mathrm{I}<br />
\end{array}\right.\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\mathrm{B} \oint \mathrm{d} l=\mu_0 \mathrm{I} \Rightarrow \mathrm{B} \times 2 \pi \mathrm{r}=\mu_0 \mathrm{I}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(B=\frac{\mu_0 I}{2 \pi r}\)</p>
<p>3. The magnetic field lines form continuous closed loops, whereas electrostatic field lines never form closed loops.</p>
<p><strong>Question 12.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4414" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-A-Point-Charge.png" alt="Moving Charges And Magnetism A Point Charge" width="281" height="275" /></p>
<ol>
<li>A point charge q moving with speed v enters a uniform magnetic field B that is acting into the plane of the paper as shown. What is the path followed by the charge q and in which plane does it move?</li>
<li>How does the path followed by the charge get affected if its velocity has a component parallel to \(\vec{B}\)?</li>
<li>If an electric field \(\vec{E}\) is also applied such that the particle continues moving along the original straight-line path, what should be the magnitude and direction of the electric field \(\vec{E}\)?</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>1. Charge q moves in a circular path. It does move in X-Y plane.</p>
<p>2. If velocity has a component parallel to B then charge q moves in helical path.</p>
<p>3. \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}}=-\mathrm{V} \hat{\mathrm{i}}\)</p>
<p>[∵ The particle is moving along negative x-direction]</p>
<p>⇒ \(\vec{B}=-B \hat{k}\)</p>
<p>∵ The magnetic field is perpendicular to the plane of the paper directed inwards i.e. negative z-direction.</p>
<p>∴ Force acting due to magnetic field \(F_m=q(\vec{v} \times \vec{B})=q[-v \hat{i} \times(-B \hat{k})]\)</p>
<p>∴ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{m}}=-q v B \hat{\mathrm{j}}\) (∵ \(\hat{i} \times \hat{k}=-\hat{j}\))</p>
<p>The magnitude of F<sub>m</sub> = qvB, in -Y direction</p>
<p>For the undeflected motion of particles.</p>
<p>Fe = qE should be applied in \(y(+\hat{j})\) direction.</p>
<h2>CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 4 Moving Charges And Magnetism Long Questions And Answers</h2>
<p>Question 1. Amperes law gives a method to calculate the magnetic field due to a given current distribution. According to it, the circulation \(\oint \vec{B} \cdot d \vec{l}\) of the resultant magnetic field along a closed boundary is equal to p0 times the total current crossing the area bounded by the closed curve provided the electric field inside the loop remains constant. Ampere&#8217;s law is more useful under certain symmetrical conditions. Consider one such case of a long straight wire with a circular cross-section (radius R) carrying current 1 uniformly distributed across this cross-section.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4415" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Amperes-Law.png" alt="Moving Charges And Magnetism Amperes Law" width="341" height="341" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Amperes-Law.png 341w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Amperes-Law-300x300.png 300w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Amperes-Law-150x150.png 150w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 341px) 100vw, 341px" /></p>
<p>(1). <strong>The magnetic field at a radial distance r from the center of the wire in the region r &gt; R, is</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>\(\frac{\mu_0 I}{2 \pi r}\)</li>
<li>\(\frac{\mu_0 I}{2 \pi R}\)</li>
<li>\(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{IR}^2}{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}\)</li>
<li>\(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{Ir}^2}{2 \pi \mathrm{R}}\)</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. \(\frac{\mu_0 I}{2 \pi r}\)</p>
<p>(2). <strong>A long straight wire of a circular cross-section (radius a) carries a steady current I and the current I is uniformly distributed across this cross-section. Which of the following plots represents the variation of the magnitude of magnetic field B with distance r from the center of the wire?</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4416" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-A-Long-Stright-Wire-Corss-Section.png" alt="Moving Charges And Magnetism A Long Stright Wire Corss Section" width="678" height="369" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-A-Long-Stright-Wire-Corss-Section.png 678w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-A-Long-Stright-Wire-Corss-Section-300x163.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 678px) 100vw, 678px" /></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1.</p>
<p>(3). <strong>A long straight wire of radius R carries a steady current I. The current is uniformly distributed across its cross-section. The ratio of magnetic field al R/2 and 2R is</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>1/2</li>
<li>2</li>
<li>1/4</li>
<li>1</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. 1</p>
<p>(4).<strong> A long straight wire of a very very thin radius carries a steady current I. How magnetic field at a distance from this wire change if the value of the current in the wire is doubled?</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Doubled</li>
<li>Halved</li>
<li>Three times</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. Boubled</p>
<p><strong>Question 2. Read the case study carefully and answer the questions that follow:</strong></p>
<p>A galvanometer is a device used to detect current in an electric circuit. It cannot as such be used as an ammeter to measure current in a given circuit. This is because a galvanometer is a very sensitive device, It gives a full-scale deflection for a current of the order of μA.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4417" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-A-Galvanometer.png" alt="Moving Charges And Magnetism A Galvanometer" width="422" height="256" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-A-Galvanometer.png 422w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-A-Galvanometer-300x182.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 422px) 100vw, 422px" /></p>
<p>Moreover, for measuring currents, the galvanometer has to be connected in series, and it has a large resistance, this will change the value of the current in the circuit. To overcome these difficulties, we connect a small resistance Rs, called shunt resistance, in parallel with the galvanometer coil, so that most of the current passes through the shunt.</p>
<p>Now to use a galvanometer as a voltmeter, it has to be connected in parallel with the circuit element across which we need to measure p.d. Moreover, it must draw a very small current, otherwise, it will appreciably change the voltage that we are measuring. To ensure this a large resistance R is connected in series with the galvanometer.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4418" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-A-Galvanometer-As-A-Voltmeter.png" alt="Moving Charges And Magnetism A Galvanometer As A Voltmeter" width="432" height="250" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-A-Galvanometer-As-A-Voltmeter.png 432w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-A-Galvanometer-As-A-Voltmeter-300x174.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 432px) 100vw, 432px" /></p>
<p><strong>Based on the information given above, answer the following questions:</strong></p>
<p>(1). <strong>A sensitive galvanometer like a moving coil galvanometer can be converted into an ammeter or a voltmeter by connecting a proper resistance to it. Which of the following statements is true:-</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>A voltmeter is connected in parallel and current through it is negligible</li>
<li>An ammeter is connected in parallel and the potential difference across it is small</li>
<li>A voltmeter is connected in series and the potential difference across it is small</li>
<li>An ammeter is connected in series in a circuit and the current through it is negligible</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. A voltmeter is connected in parallel and current through it is negligible</p>
<p><strong>(2). By mistake a voltmeter is connected in series and an ammeter is connected in parallel with a resistance in an electrical circuit. What will happen to the instruments?</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Voltmeter is damaged</li>
<li>Ammeter is damaged</li>
<li>Both are damaged</li>
<li>None is damaged.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. None is damaged.</p>
<p>(3). <strong>A galvanometer coil has a resistance of 15 Ω and gives full-scale deflection for a current of 4 mA. To convert it to an ammeter of range 0 to 6 A.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>10 m Ω resistance is connected in parallel to the galvanometer.</li>
<li>10 m Ω resistance is to be connected in series with the galvanometer.</li>
<li>0.1 Ω resistance is to be connected in parallel to the galvanometer.</li>
<li>0.1 Ω resistance is to be connected in series with the galvanometer.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. 10 m Ω resistance is connected in parallel to the galvanometer.</p>
<p>(4). <strong>A long straight wire of a very very thin radius carries a steady current I. How magnetic field at a distance from this wire change if the value of the current in the wire is doubled?</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>More</li>
<li>Equal</li>
<li>Less</li>
<li>Zero</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. More</p>
<p><strong>Question 3.</strong></p>
<p>1. An α-particle, a deuteron, and a proton enter into a uniform magnetic field normally with the same kinetic energy and describe circular paths. Find the ratio of radii of their paths.</p>
<p>2. Give the direction of the magnetic field acting on the current-carrying coil ACDE shown in the figure so that the coil is in unstable equilibrium.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4419" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Direction-Of-Magnetic-Field-Acting-On-The-Current-Carrying-Coil.png" alt="Moving Charges And Magnetism Direction Of Magnetic Field Acting On The Current Carrying Coil" width="312" height="325" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Direction-Of-Magnetic-Field-Acting-On-The-Current-Carrying-Coil.png 312w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Direction-Of-Magnetic-Field-Acting-On-The-Current-Carrying-Coil-288x300.png 288w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 312px) 100vw, 312px" /></p>
<p>3. Why do we use a low resistance ammeter in a circuit to measure current?</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>⇒ \(K=\frac{q^2 B^2 r^2}{2 m}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(r=\sqrt{\frac{2 m K}{q^2 B^2}}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(r=\frac{\sqrt{2 m K}}{q B}\)</p>
<p>K.B.2 → constant</p>
<p>⇒ \(r \propto \frac{\sqrt{m}}{q}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\begin{array}{c|c|c}<br />
\alpha \rightarrow{ }_2 \mathrm{He}^{4} &amp; \mathrm{d} \rightarrow{ }_1 \mathrm{H}^2 &amp; \mathrm{P} \rightarrow{ }_1 \mathrm{H}^{1} \\<br />
\mathrm{m}^{\prime}=4 \mathrm{~m} &amp; \mathrm{~m}^{\prime \prime}=2 \mathrm{~m} &amp; \mathrm{~m}=\mathrm{m} \\<br />
\mathrm{q}^{\prime}=2 \mathrm{q} &amp; \mathrm{q}^{\prime \prime}=\mathrm{q} &amp; \mathrm{q}=\mathrm{q}<br />
\end{array}\)</p>
<p>So, \(r_\alpha: r_d: r_p=\frac{\sqrt{4 m}}{2 q}: \frac{\sqrt{2 m}}{q}: \frac{\sqrt{m}}{q}\)</p>
<p>1:2:1</p>
<p>2. For an unstable equilibrium direction of the area and magnetic field must be opposite so the magnetic field must be in the Z direction.</p>
<p>3. So that maximum current flows through the ammeter.</p>
<p><strong>Question 4.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Draw the magnetic field lines due to a circular wire carrying current I.</li>
<li>A square loop of sides 5 cm carrying a current of 0.2 A in the clockwise direction is placed at a distance of 10 cm from an infinitely long wire carrying a current of I A as shown. Calculate
<ol>
<li>The resultant magnetic force, and</li>
<li>The torque, if any, acting on the loop</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ol>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4421" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-A-Square-Loop.png" alt="Moving Charges And Magnetism A Square Loop" width="328" height="374" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-A-Square-Loop.png 328w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-A-Square-Loop-263x300.png 263w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 328px) 100vw, 328px" /></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>1. Magnetic field due to a circular wire carrying current I.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4422" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Magnetic-Field-Due-To-Circular-Coil-Wire-Carrying-Current.png" alt="Moving Charges And Magnetism Magnetic Field Due To Circular Coil Wire Carrying Current" width="322" height="345" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Magnetic-Field-Due-To-Circular-Coil-Wire-Carrying-Current.png 322w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Magnetic-Field-Due-To-Circular-Coil-Wire-Carrying-Current-280x300.png 280w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 322px) 100vw, 322px" /></p>
<p>2. (1). Force on the side be an ad are same in magnitude and opposite in direction. So they cancel each other.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4424" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Force-Are-Same-In-Magnitude-and-aopposite-In-Direction.png" alt="Moving Charges And Magnetism Force Are Same In Magnitude and aopposite In Direction" width="304" height="322" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Force-Are-Same-In-Magnitude-and-aopposite-In-Direction.png 304w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Force-Are-Same-In-Magnitude-and-aopposite-In-Direction-283x300.png 283w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 304px) 100vw, 304px" /></p>
<p>⇒ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_2=-\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_4\)</p>
<p>⇒ \({\vec{F}}_2+\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{+}=0\)</p>
<p>Force on side (ab)</p>
<p>⇒ \(F_1=\left(\frac{\mu_0 I_1 I_2}{2 \pi d_1}\right) \times l\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(F_1=\left(\frac{4 \pi \times 10^{-7} \times 1 \times 0.2}{2 \pi \times 10}\right) \times 5\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\mathrm{F}_1=2 \times 10^{-8} \mathrm{~N}\) (towards left)</p>
<p>Force on side (cd)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\mathrm{F}_3=\left(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{I}_1 \mathrm{I}_2}{2 \pi \mathrm{d}_2}\right) \times l\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(F_3=\left(\frac{4 \pi \times 10^{-7} \times 1 \times 0.2}{2 \pi \times 15}\right) \times 5 \Rightarrow F_3=\frac{4}{3} \times 10^{-8} \mathrm{~N}\)</p>
<p>The resultant force on the loop,</p>
<p>F = F<sub>1</sub>-F<sub>2</sub> (∵ F<sub>1</sub> and F<sub>3</sub> are oop.)</p>
<p>\(\)\left(2-\frac{4}{3}\right) \times 10^{-8} \Rightarrow \mathrm{F}=\frac{2}{3} \times 10^{-8} \mathrm{~N} (towards left)</p>
<p>(2). Torque on square loop &#8216;Abcd&#8217;</p>
<p>τ = MB sinθ (∵ θ = 0)</p>
<p>τ = 0</p>
<p><strong>Question 5.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>With the help of a neat and labeled diagram, explain the principle and working of a moving coil galvanometer.</li>
<li>What is the function of a uniform radial field and how it is produced?</li>
<li>Define the current sensitivity of a galvanometer. How is current sensitivity increased?</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>1. <strong>Principle:</strong> When the current-carrying coil is placed in a magnetic field it experiences a torque.</p>
<p>τ = NI AB → (1)</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4426" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Moving-Coil-Galvanometer.png" alt="Moving Charges And Magnetism Moving Coil Galvanometer" width="343" height="427" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Moving-Coil-Galvanometer.png 343w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Moving-Coil-Galvanometer-241x300.png 241w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 343px) 100vw, 343px" /></p>
<p>It consists of a plane coil of many turns suspended in a radial magnetic field. When a current is passed in the coil it experiences a torque which produces a twist in the<br />
suspension.</p>
<p>This deflection is directly proportional to the torque</p>
<p>τ= KΦ → (2)</p>
<p>By equation (1) and (2)</p>
<p>∵ N1AB = KΦ;</p>
<p>⇒ \(I=\left(\frac{K}{N A B}\right) \phi\);</p>
<p>K = elastic torsional constant of the suspension</p>
<p>⇒ \(\mathrm{I}=\mathrm{C} \phi ; \mathrm{C}=\frac{\mathrm{K}}{\mathrm{NAB}}\)</p>
<p>C ⇒ Galvanometer constant</p>
<p>So I ∝ Φ</p>
<p>τ ∝ I</p>
<p><strong>Galvanometer:</strong></p>
<p>An instrument used to measure the strength of current by measuring the deflection of the coil due to torque produced by a magnetic field.</p>
<p>τ ∝ i∝θ</p>
<p><strong>Current Sensitivity (CS)</strong></p>
<p>It is defined as the deflection per unit current.</p>
<p>⇒ \(C S=0 / I=\frac{N A B}{K}\)</p>
<p><strong>Voltage Sensitivity (VS)</strong></p>
<p>It is defined as deflection per unit voltage.</p>
<p>⇒ \(V S=\phi / V=Φ / I R=\left(\frac{N A B}{K R}\right)\)</p>
<p>2. The function of radial field, is.</p>
<ol>
<li>To maximize the deflecting torque acting on the current carrying coil.</li>
<li>To increase the strength of the magnetic field.</li>
</ol>
<p>The radial magnetic field is produced by using a concave magnetic pole. Also cylindrical soft iron core helps in the production of the radial magnetic field.</p>
<p>3. Current sensitivity is the deflection shown by the galvanometer for a unit current flow.</p>
<p>⇒ \(I_S=\frac{\phi}{I} \text { or } \frac{N A B}{K}\)</p>
<p>Where Φ is the deflection in the coil.</p>
<p>The current sensitivity of the galvanometer can be increased by</p>
<ol>
<li>Increasing the number of turns (N )</li>
<li>Increasing magnetic induction (B)</li>
<li>Increasing area of coil (A)</li>
<li>Decreasing the couple per unit twist of the spiral springs.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Question 6.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Use it to obtain the expression for the magnetic field at an axial point situated at distance d from the center of a circular coil of radius R carrying current I.</li>
<li>Also, find the ratio of the magnitudes of the magnetic field of this coil at the center and at an axial point for which x = R√3.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>1. Vector form of Biot-Savart&#8217;s law</p>
<p>⇒ \(d \vec{B}=\frac{\mu_0 I}{4 \pi r^2}(d \vec{l} \times \hat{r})\left\{\hat{r}=\frac{\vec{r}}{r}\right.\)</p>
<p>The magnetic field at an axial point of a current-carrying circular loop:</p>
<p>⇒ \(d\vec{B}=\frac{\mu_{0} \mathrm{I}}{4 \pi \mathrm{r}^3}(\mathrm{~d} \vec{l} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}})\)</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4427" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Centre-Of-A-Circular-Coil.png" alt="Moving Charges And Magnetism Centre Of A Circular Coil" width="519" height="301" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Centre-Of-A-Circular-Coil.png 519w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Centre-Of-A-Circular-Coil-300x174.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 519px) 100vw, 519px" /></p>
<p>Magnetic field due to the small element at point &#8216;P&#8217;</p>
<p>⇒ \(\mathrm{dB}=\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{Id} l \sin \theta}{4 \pi r^2}\)</p>
<p>Angle between \(d\vec{l}\) and \(\hat{r}\) is always 90 ( = 90°). The direction of the magnetic field is perpendicular to the plane of \(d\vec{l}\) and \(\hat{r}\).</p>
<p>⇒ \(\mathrm{dB}=\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{Id} l}{4 \pi \mathrm{r}^2}\left\{\sin 90^{\circ}=1\right.\)</p>
<p>The total magnetic field at point P</p>
<p>⇒ \(\mathrm{B}_{\text {axis }}=\int_0^{2 \pi \mathrm{R}} \mathrm{dB} \sin \phi\) ⇒ \(\mathrm{B}_{\mathrm{axis}}=\int_0^{2 \pi \mathrm{R}} \frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{Id} l}{4 \pi \mathrm{r}^2} \times \frac{\mathrm{R}}{\mathrm{r}}\left\{\sin \phi=\frac{\mathrm{R}}{\mathrm{r}}\right.\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\mathrm{B}_{\mathrm{axis}}=\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{IR}}{4 \pi \mathrm{r}^3} \int_0^{2 \pi \mathrm{R}} \mathrm{d} l\) ⇒ \(B_{\text {axis }}=\frac{\mu_0 I R}{4 \pi r^3} \times 2 \pi R\) ⇒ \(\mathrm{B}_{\mathrm{axis}}=\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{IR}^2}{2 \mathrm{r}^3}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(B_{\mathrm{axis}}=\frac{\mu_0 I R^2}{2\left(R^2+x^2\right)^{3 / 2}}\left\{r=\left(R^2+x^2\right)^{1 / 2}\right.\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(B_{\text {axis }}=\frac{\mu_0 \text { NIR }^2}{2\left(R^2+x^2\right)^{3 / 2}}\)</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4428" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Total-Magnetic-Field.png" alt="Moving Charges And Magnetism Total Magnetic Field" width="474" height="291" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Total-Magnetic-Field.png 474w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Moving-Charges-And-Magnetism-Total-Magnetic-Field-300x184.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 474px) 100vw, 474px" /></p>
<p>2. At the center of the current loop</p>
<p>⇒ \(B_0=\frac{\mu_0 N I}{2 R}\)</p>
<p>At the axial point x = R√3</p>
<p>⇒<sub>1</sub>\(B_1=\frac{\mu_0 NI R^2}{2\left(R^2+3 R^2\right)^{3 / 2}}=\frac{\mu_0 NI R^2}{2 \times 8 R^3}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{B_0}{B_1}=\frac{\frac{\mu_0 N I}{2 R}}{\frac{\mu_0 N I}{2 \times 8 R}}=8: 1\)</p>
<p>The post <a rel="nofollow" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics-chapter-4/">Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism</a> appeared first on <a rel="nofollow" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com">CBSE School Notes</a>.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
					<wfw:commentRss>https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics-chapter-4/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
			<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 5 Magnetism and Matter</title>
		<link>https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics-chapter-5/</link>
					<comments>https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics-chapter-5/#respond</comments>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[Kristensmith Taylor]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Wed, 22 May 2024 04:55:23 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[Class 12 Physics]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://cbseschoolnotes.com/?p=4454</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[<p>CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 5  Magnetism And Matter Multiple Choice Questions And Answers Question 1. The vertical component of the earth’s magnetic field at a place is times the horizontal component. The angle trip of dip at that place is: 0° 30° 45° 60° Answer: 2. 30° Read and Learn More Important Questions for ... <a title="Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 5 Magnetism and Matter" class="read-more" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics-chapter-5/" aria-label="More on Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 5 Magnetism and Matter">Read more</a></p>
<p>The post <a rel="nofollow" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics-chapter-5/">Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 5 Magnetism and Matter</a> appeared first on <a rel="nofollow" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com">CBSE School Notes</a>.</p>
]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<h2>CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 5  Magnetism And Matter Multiple Choice Questions And Answers</h2>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-6813" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Important-Questions-for-CBSE-Class-12-Physics-Chapter-5-Magnetism-and-Matter.png" alt="Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 5 Magnetism and Matter" width="798" height="372" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Important-Questions-for-CBSE-Class-12-Physics-Chapter-5-Magnetism-and-Matter.png 798w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Important-Questions-for-CBSE-Class-12-Physics-Chapter-5-Magnetism-and-Matter-300x140.png 300w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Important-Questions-for-CBSE-Class-12-Physics-Chapter-5-Magnetism-and-Matter-768x358.png 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 798px) 100vw, 798px" /></p>
<p><strong>Question 1. The vertical component of the earth’s magnetic field at a place is \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{3}}\) times the horizontal component. The angle trip of dip at that place is:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>0°</li>
<li>30°</li>
<li>45°</li>
<li>60°</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 2. 30°</p>
<p><strong>Read and Learn More<a href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics/"> Important Questions for Class 12 Physics with Answers</a></strong></p>
<p><strong>Question 2. Inside a bar magnet, the magnetic field lines</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Are not present</li>
<li>Are parallel to the cross-sectional area</li>
<li>Are in the direction from N-poIcs to S-pole</li>
<li>Are in the direction from S-pole to N-pole</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. Are in the direction from S-pole to N-pole</p>
<p><strong>Question 3. A magnetic needle is kept nonparallel to the magnetic field in non-uniform magnetic field experiences.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>A force but not a torque</li>
<li>Torque but not a force</li>
<li>Both a force and a torque</li>
<li>Neither a force nor a torque</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. Both a force and a torque</p>
<p><strong>Question 4. When a paramagnetic substance is brought near a north pole or a south pole of a bar magnet, it __________.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Experience repulsion</li>
<li>Docs do not experience attraction or repulsion</li>
<li>Experience attraction</li>
<li>Experience attraction or repulsion depending upon which pole is brought near to it.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. Experience attraction</p>
<p>Initially m&#8217; = q<sub>m</sub> x l</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4492" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Magnetism-And-Matter-Bar-magnet.png" alt="Magnetism And Matter Bar magnet" width="394" height="263" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Magnetism-And-Matter-Bar-magnet.png 394w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Magnetism-And-Matter-Bar-magnet-300x200.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 394px) 100vw, 394px" /></p>
<p>after bending</p>
<p>m&#8217; = q<sub>m</sub> x 2r</p>
<p>⇒ \(m^{\prime}=\frac{m}{l} \times 2 \times \frac{l}{\pi}\)  [ πr = l ]</p>
<p>∴ \(m^{\prime}=\frac{2 m}{\pi}\)</p>
<p><strong>question 5. A straight steel wire of length l has magnetic moment m. If the wire is bent in the form of a semicircle, the new value of the magnetic dipole moment is.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>m</li>
<li>\(\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\pi}\)</li>
<li>\(\frac{m}{2}\)</li>
<li>\(\frac{2 \mathrm{~m}}{\pi}\)</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. \(\frac{2 \mathrm{~m}}{\pi}\)</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4493" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Magnetism-And-Matter-A-Straight-Steel-Wire.png" alt="Magnetism And Matter A Straight Steel Wire" width="367" height="173" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Magnetism-And-Matter-A-Straight-Steel-Wire.png 367w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Magnetism-And-Matter-A-Straight-Steel-Wire-300x141.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 367px) 100vw, 367px" /></p>
<p>Initially</p>
<p>m = q<sub>m</sub> x l</p>
<p>⇒ \(\mathrm{m}^{\prime}=\mathrm{q}_{\mathrm{m}} \times \frac{l}{2}\)</p>
<p>(q<sub>m</sub> will not change)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\mathrm{m}^{\prime}=\frac{\mathrm{m}}{2}\)</p>
<p>∴ \(\vec{P}\) remains constant.</p>
<p><strong>Question 6. A bar magnet of length l, pole strength &#8216;P&#8217;, and magnetic moment &#8216;\(\vec{m}\)&#8216; is split into two equal pieces each of length l/2. The magnetic moment and pole strength of each piece respectively ________ and ________.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>\(\vec{m}, \frac{p}{2}\)</li>
<li>\(\frac{\vec{m}}{2}, p\)</li>
<li>\(\frac{\vec{m}}{2}, \frac{p}{2}\)</li>
<li>\(\vec{m}, p\)</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 2. \(\frac{\vec{m}}{2}, p\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 7. For superconductors, μ<sub>r</sub> = _________.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Zero</li>
<li>Infinite</li>
<li>Positive</li>
<li>Negative</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. Zero</p>
<p><strong>Question 8. Which one of the following represents Curie&#8217;s law?</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>\(M=\frac{C B_0}{T}\)</li>
<li>\(M=\frac{C \chi}{T}\)</li>
<li>\(M=\frac{C \chi}{T-T_C}\)</li>
<li>\(M=\frac{C T}{B_0}\)</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. \(M=\frac{C B_0}{T}\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 9. Meissner effect is observed in _________ substance.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Paramagnetic</li>
<li>Ferromagnetic</li>
<li>Superconducting</li>
<li>Permanent magnetic</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. Superconducting</p>
<p><strong>Question 10. According to Gauss&#8217;s law for magnetism, the net magnetic flux through any closed surface is _________.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Equal to ε<sub>0</sub></li>
<li>Infinite</li>
<li>Zero</li>
<li>Equal to μ<sub>0</sub></li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. Zero</p>
<h2>CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 5  Magnetism And Matter Assertion And Reason</h2>
<p>For question numbers 1 to 4 two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct answer to these questions from the codes (1), and (2). (3) and (4) as given below.</p>
<ol>
<li>Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A</li>
<li>Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A</li>
<li>A is true but R is false</li>
<li>A is false and R is also false</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Question 1. Assertion:</strong> A bar magnet experiences a torque when placed in a magnetic field.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> A bar magnet exerts a torque on itself due to its magnetic field.</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. A is true but R is false</p>
<p><strong>Question 2. Assertion:</strong> The magnetic moment of the helium atom is zero.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> All the electrons are paired in helium atom orbitals.</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A</p>
<p><strong>Question 3. Assertion:</strong> An atom behaves as a magnetic dipole.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> It is because an atom contains equal positive and negative charges.</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. A is true but R is false</p>
<p><strong>Question 4. Assertion:</strong> When the radius of a circular loop carrying current is doubled, its magnetic moment becomes four times.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> Magnetic moment depends on the area of the loop.</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 2. Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A</p>
<h2>CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 5  Magnetism And Matter Short Questions And Answers</h2>
<p><strong>Question 1. The magnetic moment of a circular coil carrying current I, having N turns, each of radius r, is M. Find the magnetic moment of the same coil if it is unwound and rewound into a coil having 2N turns for the same current.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>M = NIA = NIπ<sup>2</sup></p>
<p>According to question N(2πr) = 2N(2πr&#8217;)</p>
<p>⇒ \(r^{\prime}=\frac{r}{2}\)</p>
<p>So, New magnetic movement M&#8217; = \((2 \mathrm{~N}) \mathrm{I} \pi\left(\frac{\mathrm{r}}{2}\right)^2=\frac{\mathrm{NI} \pi \mathrm{r}^2}{2}=\frac{\mathrm{M}}{2}\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 2. </strong><strong>The bar magnet of magnetic moment 6 J/T is aligned at 60° with a uniform external magnetic field of 0.44 T. Calculate</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>The work done in turning the magnet to align its magnetic moment
<ol>
<li>Normal to the magnetic field,</li>
<li>Opposite to the magnetic field, and</li>
</ol>
</li>
<li>The torque on the magnet in the final orientation in case (2)</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>Magnetic moment M = 6J/T</p>
<p>Magnetic field B = 0.44 T</p>
<p>(1). Work done in rotating the magnet normal to the magnetic field</p>
<p>W = MB(cosθ<sub>1</sub> &#8211; cosθ<sub>2</sub>)</p>
<p>where θ<sub>1</sub> =60° and θ<sub>2</sub> = 90°</p>
<p>W = 6 x 0.44 (cos60°- cos90°) = 6 x 0.44 (0.5- 0) = 1 .32 J</p>
<p>(2). Work done in rotating the magnet opposite to the magnetic field</p>
<p>W = MB(cosθ<sub>1</sub> &#8211; cosθ<sub>2</sub>)</p>
<p>Where θ<sub>1</sub> =60°and θ<sub>2</sub> = 180°</p>
<p>W = 6 x 0.44 (cos60°- cos 180°) = 6 x 0.44 (0.5 + 1 ) = 3.96 J</p>
<p>2. Torque in case (2) τ = MB sin θ<sub>2</sub> ⇒ τ = 6 x 0.44 x sin 180° = 0</p>
<p><strong>Question 3. </strong></p>
<ol>
<li>An iron ring of relative permeability |.ir has windings of insulated copper wire of n turns per meter. When the current in the windings is I, find the expression for the magnetic field in the ring.</li>
<li>The susceptibility of a magnetic material is 0.9853. Identify the type of magnetic material. Draw the modification of the field pattern by keeping a piece of this material in a uniform magnetic field.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>1. Consider a ring of radius r having n turns per meter, If n is the number of turns per meter, then the total number of turns in the ring = perimeter times the number of turns = 2πrn = N</p>
<p>Current enclosed = NI = 2πrn I.</p>
<p>By Ampere&#8217;s circuital law, \(\oint \vec{B} \cdot d \vec{l}=\mu_0 I\)</p>
<p>B x 2πr = μ<sub>0 </sub>2π rnI or B= μ<sub>0</sub>nl</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4494" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Magnetism-And-Matter-Amperes-Circuital-Law.png" alt="Magnetism And Matter Ampere's Circuital Law" width="330" height="404" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Magnetism-And-Matter-Amperes-Circuital-Law.png 330w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Magnetism-And-Matter-Amperes-Circuital-Law-245x300.png 245w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 330px) 100vw, 330px" /></p>
<p>2. Given, susceptibility, χ = 0.9853.</p>
<p>The material is paramagnetic.</p>
<p>If a piece of this material is kept in a uniform magnetic field, then the field pattern gets modified as follows:</p>
<p>The lines of force tend to pass through the material rather than the surrounding air.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4495" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Magnetism-And-Matter-Paramagnetic-In-Nature.png" alt="Magnetism And Matter Paramagnetic In Nature" width="342" height="295" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Magnetism-And-Matter-Paramagnetic-In-Nature.png 342w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Magnetism-And-Matter-Paramagnetic-In-Nature-300x259.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 342px) 100vw, 342px" /></p>
<p><strong>Question 4. Different diamagnetic, paramagnetic, and ferromagnetic substances based on their properties.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4497" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Magnetism-And-Matter-Differentiate-Diamagnetic-Paramagnetic-And-Ferromagnetic-substances-And-Their-Properties.png" alt="Magnetism And Matter Differentiate Diamagnetic, Paramagnetic And Ferromagnetic substances And Their Properties" width="791" height="949" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Magnetism-And-Matter-Differentiate-Diamagnetic-Paramagnetic-And-Ferromagnetic-substances-And-Their-Properties.png 791w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Magnetism-And-Matter-Differentiate-Diamagnetic-Paramagnetic-And-Ferromagnetic-substances-And-Their-Properties-250x300.png 250w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Magnetism-And-Matter-Differentiate-Diamagnetic-Paramagnetic-And-Ferromagnetic-substances-And-Their-Properties-768x921.png 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 791px) 100vw, 791px" /></p>
<h2>CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 5 Magnetism And Matter Long Questions And Answers</h2>
<p><strong>Question 1.</strong> When the atomic dipoles are aligned partially or fully, there is a net magnetic moment in the direction of the field in any small volume of the material. The actual magnetic field inside the material placed in a magnetic field is the sum of the applied magnetic field and the magnetic field due to magnetization. This field is called magnetic intensity (H).</p>
<p>H = B/μ<sub>0</sub>-M</p>
<p>where M is the magnetization of the material p0, is the permittivity of vacuum and B is the total magnetic field. The measure that tells us how a magnetic material responds to an external field is given by a dimensionless quantity is appropriately called the magnetic susceptibility; for a certain class of magnetic materials, the intensity of magnetization is directly proportional to the magnetic intensity.</p>
<p>(1). <strong>Identify the wrongly matched quantity and unit pair.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Pole strength &#8211; A-m</li>
<li>Magnetic susceptibility &#8211; dimensionless number</li>
<li>Intensity of magnetisation &#8211; A/m</li>
<li>Magnetic permeability- henry-m</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. Magnetic permeability- henry-m</p>
<p>(2). <strong>A bar magnet has a length of 3 cm, a cross-sectional area of 2 cm<sup>2</sup>, and a magnetic moment of 3 A-m<sup>2</sup>. The intensity of magnetization of a bar magnet is</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>2 x 10<sup>5</sup> A/m</li>
<li>3 x 10<sup>5</sup> A/m</li>
<li>4 x 10<sup>5</sup> A/m</li>
<li>5 x 10<sup>5</sup> A/m</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. 5 x 10<sup>5</sup> A/m</p>
<p>(3). <strong>A solenoid has a core of material with a relative permeability of 500 and its windings carry a current of A. The number of turns in the solenoid is 500 per meter. The magnetization of the material is nearly:-</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>2.5 x 10<sup>3</sup> A/m</li>
<li>2.5 x 10<sup>5</sup> A/m</li>
<li>2 x 10<sup>3</sup> A/m</li>
<li>2 x 10<sup>5</sup> A/m</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 2. 2.5 x 10<sup>5</sup> A/m</p>
<p>(4). <strong>The relative permeability of iron is 6000. Its magnetic susceptibility is</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>5999</li>
<li>6001</li>
<li>6000 x 10<sup>-7</sup></li>
<li>6000 x 10<sup>-7</sup></li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. 5999</p>
<p>The post <a rel="nofollow" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics-chapter-5/">Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 5 Magnetism and Matter</a> appeared first on <a rel="nofollow" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com">CBSE School Notes</a>.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
					<wfw:commentRss>https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics-chapter-5/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
			<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction</title>
		<link>https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-class-12-physics-chapter-6/</link>
					<comments>https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-class-12-physics-chapter-6/#respond</comments>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[Kristensmith Taylor]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Wed, 22 May 2024 04:52:28 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[Class 12 Physics]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://cbseschoolnotes.com/?p=4517</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[<p>Electromagnetic Induction Class 12 Pdf CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Multiple Choice Questions And Answers Question 1. Lenz&#8217;s law is the consequence of the law of conservation of: Energy Charge Mass Momentum Answer: 1. Energy Read and Learn More Important Questions for Class 12 Physics with Answers Question 2. The emf induced ... <a title="Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction" class="read-more" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-class-12-physics-chapter-6/" aria-label="More on Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction">Read more</a></p>
<p>The post <a rel="nofollow" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-class-12-physics-chapter-6/">Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction</a> appeared first on <a rel="nofollow" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com">CBSE School Notes</a>.</p>
]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<h2>Electromagnetic Induction Class 12 Pdf</h2>
<h2>CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Multiple Choice Questions And Answers</h2>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-6816" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Important-Questions-for-CBSE-Class-12-Physics-Chapter-6-Electromagnetic-Induction.png" alt="Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction" width="802" height="400" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Important-Questions-for-CBSE-Class-12-Physics-Chapter-6-Electromagnetic-Induction.png 802w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Important-Questions-for-CBSE-Class-12-Physics-Chapter-6-Electromagnetic-Induction-300x150.png 300w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Important-Questions-for-CBSE-Class-12-Physics-Chapter-6-Electromagnetic-Induction-768x383.png 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 802px) 100vw, 802px" /></p>
<p><strong>Question 1. Lenz&#8217;s law is the consequence of the law of conservation of:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Energy</li>
<li>Charge</li>
<li>Mass</li>
<li>Momentum</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. Energy</p>
<p><strong>Read and Learn More<a href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics/"> Important Questions for Class 12 Physics with Answers</a></strong></p>
<p>Question 2. The emf induced in a 10H inductor in which current changes from 11 A to 2A in 9 x 10<sup>-1</sup> s is :</p>
<ol>
<li>10<sup>4</sup> V</li>
<li>10<sup>3</sup> V</li>
<li>10<sup>2</sup> V</li>
<li>10 V</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. 10<sup>2</sup> V</p>
<p>⇒ \(\mathrm{e}=-\mathrm{L} \frac{\Delta \mathrm{I}}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}\)</p>
<p>∴ \(e=\frac{-10 \times(2-11)}{9 \times 10^{-1}}=10^2 \mathrm{~V}\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 3. A metal plate is getting heated. Which one of the following statements is incorrect?</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>It is placed in a space-varying magnetic field that does not vary with time.</li>
<li>A direct current is passing through the plate.</li>
<li>An alternating current is passing through the plate.</li>
<li>It is placed in a time-varying magnetic field.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. It is placed in a space-varying magnetic field that does not vary with time.</p>
<p><strong>Question 4. The magnetic flux linked with a coil is given by Φ = 5t<sup>2</sup>+ 3t + 10, where Φ is in Weber and l is in second. The induced emf in the coil at t = 5 sec will be</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>53 V</li>
<li>43 V</li>
<li>10 V</li>
<li>6 V</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. 53 V</p>
<p>⇒ \(\mathrm{e}=-\frac{\mathrm{d} \phi}{\mathrm{dt}}\)</p>
<p>e = 10t + 3</p>
<p>e = 10(5) + 3 = 53V</p>
<p><strong>Question 5. The magnetic flux linked with a coil changes with time t (second) according to Φ = 6t<sup>2</sup>&#8211; 5t + 1, where Φ is in Wb. At l = 0.5 S, the induced current in the coil is ______ The resistance of the circuit is 10 Ω.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>1 A</li>
<li>0.1 A</li>
<li>0.1 mA</li>
<li>10 A</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 2. 0.1 A</p>
<p>⇒ \(\mathrm{e}=-\frac{\mathrm{d} \phi}{\mathrm{dt}}\)</p>
<p>e = -(12t-5)</p>
<p>e = -(12 x 0.5-5)</p>
<p>e = 1</p>
<p>⇒ \(|\mathrm{e}|=1 \mathrm{~V}\)</p>
<p>∴ \(I=\frac{e}{R}=\frac{1}{10}=0.1 \mathrm{~A}\)</p>
<p>Question 6. A square conducting coil of area 100 cm2 is placed normally inside a uniform magnetic field of 103 Wbm-2. The magnetic flux linked with the coil is ______ wb.</p>
<ol>
<li>10</li>
<li>10<sup>-5</sup></li>
<li>10-g</li>
<li>0</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. 10</p>
<p>= BA</p>
<p>= 10<sup>3</sup> x 100 x 10<sup>&#8211; 4</sup></p>
<p>= 100 weber</p>
<p><strong>Electromagnetic Induction Class 12 PDF</strong></p>
<p><strong>Question 7. The self-inductance of two solenoids A and B having equal lengths are the same. If the number of turns in two solenoids A and B arc 100 and 200 respectively. The ratio of radii of their cross-section will be</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>2:1</li>
<li>1:2</li>
<li>1:4</li>
<li>4:1</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. 2:1</p>
<p>⇒ \(L=\frac{\mu_r \mu_0 N^2 \pi r^2}{l}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(r^2=\frac{L \times l}{\mu_r \mu_0 N^2 \pi}\)</p>
<p>l, L, r, 0, &#8211; constant</p>
\(r \propto \frac{1}{N}\)
\(\frac{r_1}{r_2}=\frac{N_2}{N_1}=\frac{200}{100}=2: 1\)
<p>Question 8. A magnet is moving towards a coil along its axis and the emf induced in the coil is s. If the coil also starts moving towards the magnet with the same speed, the induced emf will be</p>
\(\frac{\varepsilon}{2}\)
<p>2</p>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<p>4</p>
<p>Answer: 2. 2</p>
<p>Question 9. The dimensional formula of self-inductance is __________.</p>
<p>M1L2T-2A-2</p>
<p>M1L1T2A-2</p>
<p>M1L1T-2A-2</p>
<p>M1L1T-1A-1</p>
<p>Answer: 1.</p>
<p>Question 10. The mutual inductance of the system of two coils is 5 mH. The current in the first coil varies according to the equation T = I0 sin cot, where I0 = 10A and co = 100 TT rad/s. The value of maximum induced emf in the second coil is __________.</p>
<p>2V</p>
<p>5V</p>
<p>V</p>
<p>4V</p>
<p>Answer: 2. 5V</p>
\(\mathrm{e}=-\mathrm{M} \frac{\mathrm{dI}}{\mathrm{dt}}\)
<p>= -M(I0 cos t) [for max. value cos t = 1]</p>
<p>= -5 x 10-3 x 10 x 100 x (1)</p>
<p>e = -5V</p>
<p>|e| = 5V</p>
<p>Question 11. Current of 2A passing through a coil of 100 turns gives rise to a magnetic flux of 5 x 10-3 Wb per turn. The magnetic energy associated with coil is __________.</p>
<p>5 x 10-3 J</p>
<p>0.5 x 10-3</p>
<p>5 J</p>
<p>0.5 J</p>
<p>Answer: 4. 0.5 J</p>
\(\mathrm{u}=\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{LI}^2 \quad \phi=\mathrm{LI}\)
<p>= \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{\phi}{I}=\frac{1}{2} \times 5 \times 10^{-3} \times 100 \times 2=0.5 \mathrm{~J}\)</p>
<p>Question 12. The flux linked per turn of a coil of N turns changes from (|)1 and &lt;f)2- If die total resistance ol the circuit including the coil is R, the induced charge in the coil.</p>
\(-N \frac{\left(\phi_2-\phi_1\right)}{l}\)
\(-N \frac{\left(\phi_2-\phi_1\right)}{R}\)
\(-N \frac{\left(\phi_2-\phi_1\right)}{R t}\)
\(-\mathrm{N}\left(\phi_2-\phi_1\right)\)
<p>Answer: 2. \(-N \frac{\left(\phi_2-\phi_1\right)}{R}\)</p>
\(q=-\frac{N}{R} \Delta \phi\)
\(q=-\frac{N\left(\phi_2-\phi_1\right)}{R}\)
<p>Question 13. The magnitude of the induced cmf is equal to the lime rate of change of ____.</p>
<p>Electric flux</p>
<p>Magnetic force</p>
<p>Magnetic flux</p>
<p>Electric force</p>
<p>Answer: 3. Magnetic flux</p>
<p>Question 14. Unit of induced emf is _____.</p>
<p>Tesla</p>
<p>Volt/second</p>
<p>weber/second</p>
<p>volt</p>
<p>Answer: 4. Volt</p>
<p><strong>Electromagnetic Induction Class 12 PDF</strong></p>
<p>Question 15. One conducting wire of length 50 cm is moving perpendicular to uniform magnetic field of 0.2 T. with constant velocity of 10 ms 1 cmf induced between two ends of a wire is _________ V.</p>
<p>1.0</p>
<p>0.1</p>
<p>0.01</p>
<p>10</p>
<p>Answer: 1. 1.0</p>
\(e=-10 \times 0.2 \times \frac{50}{100}\)
<p>e = -1 Volt</p>
<p>|e| = 1 V</p>
<h2>CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Class 12 Electromagnetic Induction Assertion And Reason</h2>
<p>For question numbers 1 to 5 two statements arc given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct answer to these questions from the codes (1), (2), (3) and (4) as given below.</p>
<ol>
<li>Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A</li>
<li>Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A</li>
<li>A is true but R is false</li>
<li>A is false and R is also false</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Question 1. Assertion: </strong>Induced cmf in two coils made of wire of the same length and thickness, one of copper and another of aluminium is the same. The current in copper coil is more than the aluminium coil.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> Resistance of aluminium coil is more than that of copper coil.</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A</p>
<p><strong>Question 2. Assertion:</strong> If the current in an inductor is zero at any instant, then the induced emf may not be zero.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> An inductor keeps the flux (i.e. current) constant.</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A</p>
<p><strong>Question 3. Assertion:</strong> Self-induction is called the inertia of electricity.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> The inductor opposes the change in current.</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A</p>
<p><strong>Question 4. Assertion:</strong> A small magnet takes a longer time to fall into a hollow metallic tube without touching the wall.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> There is an opposition of motion due to the production of eddy currents in metallic tubes.</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A</p>
<p><strong>Question 5. Assertion:</strong> Faraday&#8217;s laws are consequences of the conservation of energy.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> In a purely resistive AC circuit, the current lags behind the EMF in phase.</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. A is false and R is also false</p>
<h2>CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 6 Class 12 Electromagnetic Induction Short Questions And Answers</h2>
<p><strong>Question 1. Two identical circular discs, one of copper and another of aluminium, are rotated about their geometrical axes with the same angular speed in the same magnetic field acting perpendicular to their planes. Compare the (1) induced cmf, and (2) induced current produced in discs between their centre and edge. Justify your answers,</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>Emf will be same for both, because it depends on N, A, B, ro and that arc same for both disc But induced current \(I=\frac{\mathrm{e}}{\mathrm{R}}=\frac{\mathrm{NAB}\omega}{\mathrm{R}}\)</p>
<p>Copper has less resistance so induced current will be higher in copper.</p>
<p><strong>Question 2. A rectangular loop PQMN with movable arm PQ of length 10 cm and resistance 2£2 is placed in a uniform magnetic field of 0.1 T acting perpendicular to the plane of the loop as is shown in the figure. The resistances of the arms MN, NP and MQ are negligible. Calculate the</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>emf induced in the arm PQ and</li>
<li>Current induced in the loop when arm PQ is moved with velocity 20 m/s</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>1. Induced emf in arm PQ</p>
<p>e = -B/v</p>
<p>c = -0.1 x 10 x 1 0-2 x 20</p>
<p>e = -0.2 V</p>
<p>2. Current induced in loop</p>
\(I=\frac{|e|}{R}=\frac{0.2}{2}=0.1 \mathrm{~A}\)
<p><strong>Question 3. Predict the polarity of the capacitor in the situation described below:</strong></p>
<p>image</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>Plate A (+ve) and plate B(-ve)</p>
<p><strong>Question 3. An aeroplane is flying horizontally from west with a velocity of 900 km/hour. Calculate the potential difference developed between the ends of its wings having a span of 20m. The horizontal component of the Earth&#8217;s magnetic field is 5 x Hr4 T and the angle of dip is 30°.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>Potential difference developed between the ends of the wings &#8216;e&#8217; = Blv</p>
<p>Given Velocity (v) = 900 km/hour</p>
<p>= 250 m/s</p>
<p>Wing span (l) = 20 m</p>
<p>Vertical component of Earth&#8217;s magnetic field</p>
<p>Bv = BH tan (5</p>
<p>= 5 x 10-4 (tan 30°) tesla</p>
<p>∴ Potential Difference</p>
<p>e = BVl</p>
<p>e = 5 x 10-4 (tan 30°) x 20 x 250</p>
\(e=\frac{5 \times 20 \times 250 \times 10^{-4}}{\sqrt{3}}\)
<p>e = 1 .44 volt</p>
<ol>
<li><strong>Question 4.</strong></li>
<li>Define self-inductance. Write its SI unit.</li>
<li>A long solenoid with 15 turns per cm has a small loop of area 2.0 cm2 placed inside the solenoid normal to its axis. If the current canned by the solenoid changes steadily from 2.0 A to 4.0 A in 0. 1 s. what is the induced cmf in the loop while the current is changing?</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>1. Self inductance of a coil is numerically equal to cmf induced in the coil, when rate of<br />
change of current is unity.</p>
\(L=\left|-\frac{\mathrm{e}}{\left(\frac{\mathrm{dl}}{\mathrm{dt}}\right)}\right|\)
<p>Or</p>
<p>L = N&lt;(&gt;/I</p>
<p>It is equal to the magnetic flux linked with coil when a unit current flow through it.</p>
<p>The S.I unit of L is henry (H).</p>
<p>2. Here, number of turns per unit length.</p>
<p>n= N/l = 15 turns/cm = 1500 turns/m</p>
<p>A = 2 cm2 = 2 x 10-4 m2</p>
<p>dl/dt = (4- 2)/0. 1 or dl/dt = 20 As-1</p>
<p>⇒ \(|\mathrm{e}|=\frac{\mathrm{d} \phi}{\mathrm{dt}}=\frac{\mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{dt}}(\mathrm{BA})\) (∵ \(B=\frac{\mu_0 N I}{l}\) )</p>
<p>⇒ \(|\mathrm{e}|=\frac{\mathrm{Ad}}{\mathrm{dt}}\left(\mu_0 \frac{\mathrm{NI}}{l}\right)=\mathrm{A} \mu_0\left(\frac{\mathrm{N}}{l}\right) \frac{\mathrm{dI}}{\mathrm{dt}}\)</p>
<p>|e| = (2 x 10-4) x 4 x 10-7 x 1500 x 20V</p>
<p>|e| = 7.5 x 10-6 V</p>
<p><strong>Question 5.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Define mutual inductance.</li>
<li>A pair of adjacent coils has a mutual inductance of 1.5 H. If the current in one coil changes from 0 to 20A in 0.5 s. what is the change of flux linked with the other coil?</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>1. Mutual Inductance : It is numerically equal to the magnetic flux linked with one coil (secondary coil) when a unit current flows through the other coil (primary coil).</p>
<p>2. Magnetic flux</p>
<p>initial = MI initial = 0 as I initial = 0</p>
<p>and final = Mfinal = 1.5 x 20 = 30Wb</p>
<p>Change in flux d= 1-2 = 30-0 = 30 weber.</p>
<p><strong>Question 6. Define the self-inductance of a coil. Obtain the expression for the energy stored in an inductor L connected across a source of cmf.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>It is numerically equal to the induced emf per unit rate of change of current through a given coil.</p>
<p>i.e. \(\mathrm{L}=\frac{\mathrm{e}}{-\frac{\mathrm{dI}}{\mathrm{dt}}}\)</p>
<p>Energy stored in an inductor: Work has to be done by battery against the opposing induced cmf in establishing a current in an inductor. The energy supplied by the battery is stored in the inductor.</p>
<p>Let current flowing through the circuit at any instant (t) be i.</p>
<p>Rate of change of current at that time = \(\frac{\mathrm{di}}{\mathrm{dt}}\)</p>
<p>image</p>
<p>magnitude of induced emf in the inductor,</p>
\(\mathrm{e}=\mathrm{L} \frac{\mathrm{di}}{\mathrm{dt}}\)
<p>Work done by the battery in time dt,</p>
<p>dW = Vdq = edq</p>
<p>dW = eidt</p>
\(d W=\left(L \frac{d i}{d t}\right) i d t\)
<p>dW = Lidi</p>
<p>Total work done by the battery in increasing current from 0 to I</p>
\(\mathrm{W}=\mathrm{L} \quad \int \mathrm{i} d i \Rightarrow \mathrm{W}=\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{LI}^2\)
<p>This work done is stored in an inductor in the form of magnetic energy.</p>
\(\mathrm{U}_{\mathrm{B}}=\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{LI}^2\)
<p>Question 7. Define mutual inductance between a pair of coils. Derive an expression for the mutual inductance of two long coaxial solenoids of the same length wound one over the other.</p>
<p>[OR. prove that M12 = M21]</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p><strong>Mutual Inductance: </strong>It is numerically equal to the magnetic flux linked with one coil (secondary coil) when unit current flows through the other coil.</p>
<p><strong>Derivation:</strong></p>
<p>image</p>
<p>For I coil, &lt;|)1 = M12, I2 (1)</p>
<p>where &lt;j)1 is the flux through I coil.</p>
<p>Similarly,</p>
<p>1 = (B2.A1)N1</p>
<p>= \(\)</p>
<p>= \(\) (2)</p>
<p>From (1) and (2)</p>
\(\)
<p>Now, 2 = M21I1 (3)</p>
<p>where ())2 is the flux through 2nd coil due to Ist coil.</p>
<p>Also. &lt;|)-, = B1 A1 N2 cos0</p>
<p>= \(\) (4)</p>
<p>(0 = 0°)</p>
<p>From (3)and (4)</p>
\(\)
\(\)
<p>∴ M12 = M21</p>
<h2>CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 6 Class 12 Electromagnetic Induction Long Questions And Answers</h2>
<p>Question 1. The emf induced across the ends of a conductor due lo its motion in a magnetic field is called motional emf. It is produced due to the magnetic Lorcnlz force acting on the free electrons of the conductor. For a circuit shown in figure, if a conductor of length f moves with velocity v in a magnetic field B perpendicular to both its length and the direction of the magnetic field, then all the induced parameters are possible in the circuit.</p>
<p>image</p>
<p>(1). Which rule is used to find direction of induced current?</p>
<p>Answer:</p>
<p>Fleming&#8217;s right hand rule</p>
<p>(2). Bicycle generator creates 1 .5 V at 15 km/hr. Find the value of EMF generated at 10 km/hr ?</p>
<p>Answer:</p>
<p>e = NABo</p>
<p>e</p>
\(\frac{1.5}{15}=\frac{x}{10}\)
<p>x = 1 volt.</p>
<p>(3). A O.i m long conductor carrying a current of 50 A is held perpendicular to a magnetic field of 1.25 mT. Find the mechanical power required to move the conductor with a speed of 1 m s-1 ?</p>
<p>Answer:</p>
<p>P = F x v = (IlB)v = 50 x 0.1 x 1.25 x 10-3 x 1</p>
<p>= 6.25 x 10-3 W = 6.25 mW</p>
<p>(4). A conducting rod of length f is moving in a transverse magnetic field of strength B with velocity v. The resistance of the rod is R. Find the expression of induced current in the rod?</p>
<p>Answer:</p>
\(I=\frac{e}{R}=\frac{B v l}{R}\)
<p>Question 2. Mutual inductance is the phenomenon of inducing cmf in a coil, due to a change of current in the neighboring coil. The amount of mutual inductance that Jinks one coil to another depends very much on the relative positioning of the two coils, their geometry and relative separation between them. Mutual inductance between the two coils increases pr, limes if the coils arc wound over an iron core of relative permeability pr.</p>
<p>image</p>
<p>(1). A short solenoid of radius a, number of turns per unit length n, and length L is kept coaxially inside a very long solenoid of radius b, number of turns per unit length n2. Write the expression for mutual inductance of the system?</p>
<p>Answer:</p>
<p>p07ta2n,n2L</p>
<p>(2). If a change in current of 0.01 A in one coil produces a change in magnetic flux of 2 x 10-2 Weber in another coil. Find the mutual inductance between coils?</p>
<p>Answer:</p>
<p>= MI</p>
\(M=\frac{\phi}{I}=\frac{2 \times 10^{-2}}{0.01}\)
<p>M = 2H</p>
<p>(3). How can mutual inductance between two coils can be increased?</p>
<p>Answer:</p>
<p>By increasing the number of turns in the coils</p>
\(M=\frac{\mu_r \mu_0 N^2 A}{l}\)
<p>M N2</p>
<p>(4). When a sheet of iron is placed in between the two co-axial coils. How the mutual inductance between the coils will change?</p>
<p>Answer:</p>
<p>Increases</p>
\(\mathrm{M}=\frac{\mu_{\mathrm{r}} \mu_0 \mathrm{~N}^2 \mathrm{~A}}{l}\)
<p>M r</p>
<p>Question 3. Explain the meaning of the term mutual inductance. Consider two concentric circular coils. one of radius R and the other of radius r (R &gt; r) placed coaxially with centres coinciding with each other. Obtain the expression for the mutual inductance of the arrangement.</p>
<p>A rectangular coil of area A, having number of turns N is rotated at T revolutions per second in a uniform magnetic field B, the field being perpendicular to the coil. Prove that the maximum emf induced in the coil is 2 7tf NBA.</p>
<p>Answer:</p>
<p>1. Let current (I1) is flowing in first outer coil. The magnetic field at centre of coil</p>
\(B_1=\frac{\mu_0 I_1}{2 R}\)
<p>Flux passing through second inner coil</p>
<p>2 = B1 A2</p>
\(\phi_2=\frac{\mu_0 I_1}{2 \mathrm{R}} \times \pi \mathrm{r}^2\)
<p>From definition of mutual induction</p>
<p>2 = M21 I1</p>
\(M_{21}=\frac{\phi_2}{I_1}=\frac{\mu_0 \pi r^2}{2 R}\)
\(M_{21}=\frac{\mu_0 \pi r^2}{2 R}\)
<p>Similarly \(M_{12}=\frac{\mu_0 \pi r^2}{2 R}\)</p>
<p>M12 = M21 = M</p>
\(M=\frac{\mu_0 \pi r^2}{2 R}\)
<p>2. Magnetic flux linked with coil = &lt;j) = NBAcosG</p>
<p>The induced cmf.e = -d(|)/dt (∵ \(\omega =\frac{\mathrm{d} \theta}{\mathrm{dt}}\\) )</p>
\(\mathrm{e}=-\frac{\mathrm{d} \phi}{\mathrm{dt}}=\left(-\mathrm{NBA}(-\sin {\theta}) \frac{\mathrm{d} \theta}{\mathrm{dt}}\right)=\mathrm{NBA} \sin {\theta}\left(2 \pi \mathrm{f}\right)\)
<p>For maximum induced emf, sin0 = 1</p>
<p>∴ e = NBA(2f) =&gt; e = 27ilNBA</p>
<p>Question 4.</p>
<p>Draw a labelled diagram of an ac generator. Obtain the expression for the cmf induced in the rotating coil of N turns each of cross-sectional area A, in the presence of a magnetic field B.</p>
<p>A horizontal conducting rod 10 m long extending from cast to west is falling with a speed<br />
5.0 ms-1 at right angles to the horizontal component of the Earth&#8217;s magnetic field,<br />
0.3 x 10-4 Wb m-2. Find the instantaneous value of the emf induced in the rod.</p>
<p>Answer:</p>
<p>1. image</p>
<p>B1 and B2 are carbon brushes. S1 and S2 are slip rings.</p>
<p>Let at any instant (t), the angle between \(\vec{B}\) and \(\vec{A}\) is 0, then the magnetic flux linked with coil at that instant.</p>
\(\phi_{\mathrm{B}}=N(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}})\)
<p>= NBA cos</p>
<p>N = Number of turns in the coil</p>
<p>A = Area of the coil</p>
<p>0) = Angular velocity of coil</p>
<p>[ ∵ 0 = rot ]</p>
<p>cj)B = NBA cos rot</p>
\(\frac{d \phi_{\mathrm{B}}}{\mathrm{dt}}=\mathrm{NBA} \omega(-\sin \omega t)\)
<p>Thus induced emf, \(\mathrm{e}=-\frac{\mathrm{d} \phi_{B}}{\mathrm{dt}}\)</p>
<p>or e = NBA sint [ ∵ = t]</p>
<p>2. Given: L = 10 m, v = 5 m/s, BH = 0.3 x 10-4 Weber</p>
<p>Induced emf (e) = BH vL</p>
<p>= 0.3 x 10-4 x 5 x 10</p>
<p>= 15 x 10-4 volt</p>
<p>= 1.5 mV</p>
<p><strong>Electromagnetic Induction Class 12 PDF</strong></p>
<p><strong>Question 5.</strong></p>
<p>When a bar magnet is pushed towards (or away) from the coil connected to a galvanometer. the pointer in the galvanometer deflects. Identify the phenomenon causing this deflection and write the factors on which the amount and direction of the deflection depends. Slate the laws describing this phenomenon.</p>
<p>Sketch the change in flux and emf when a conducting rod PQ of resistance R and length l moves freely to and fro between A and C with speed v on a rectangular conductor placed in uniform magnetic field as shown in the figure.</p>
<p>image</p>
<p>Answer:</p>
<p>1. When a bar magnet pushed towards or away from coil, magnetic flux passing through coil<br />
change with lime and causes an induced emf. This phenomenon is called EMI.</p>
<p>Induced emf in the coil is given as</p>
\(\epsilon =-\mathrm{N} \frac{\mathrm{d}\phi}{\mathrm{dt}}\)
<p>Direction and amount of deflection depend on the motion of magnet whether it is moving<br />
towards the coil or away from the coil and the speed with which it moves.</p>
<p>Farady’s law of Electromagnetic Induction:</p>
<p>Whenever there is a change in magnetic flux linked with a coil, an emf is induced in the coil. The induced emf is proportional to the rate of change of magnetic flux linked with the coil.</p>
\(\varepsilon \propto \frac{\mathrm{d} \phi}{\mathrm{dt}}\)
\(\varepsilon \propto \frac{-\mathrm{d} \phi}{\mathrm{dt}} \Rightarrow \varepsilon=-\mathrm{K} \frac{\mathrm{d} \phi}{\mathrm{dt}}\)
<p>Where K is constant and negative sign represents oppositions to change in flux. In SI system is in weber, t in seconds, in volt and K = 1</p>
<p>∴ \(\varepsilon=-\frac{\mathrm{d} \phi}{\mathrm{dt}}\)</p>
<p>If the coil has N turns, then</p>
\(\varepsilon=-\mathrm{N} \frac{\mathrm{d} \phi}{\mathrm{dt}}\)
<p>2. Case 1 : When PQ moves forward</p>
<p>(1). For 0 x &lt; b</p>
<p>Magnetic field, B exists in the region</p>
<p>∴ Area of loop PQRS = l x</p>
<p>∴ Magnetic flux linked with loop PQRS.</p>
<p>&lt;]) = BA = Blx</p>
<p>(|) = Blx (1) [b &gt; x 0]</p>
<p>(2). For 2b &gt; x &gt; b</p>
<p>B =0</p>
<p>∴ Flux linked with loop PQRS is uniform and given by</p>
<p>&#8216; = Blb (x = b)</p>
<p>Forward jounery</p>
<p>Thus, for 2b x bar</p>
<p>Flux, = Bbl [constant]</p>
<p>Return journey</p>
<p>For b x 2b</p>
<p>Flux, = constant = Bbl [Decreasing]</p>
<p>Graphical representation</p>
<p>case &#8211; 2 For b&gt; x 0</p>
<p>As = Blx = \(\frac{\mathrm{d} \phi}{\mathrm{dt}}=\frac{\mathrm{Bl}\mathrm{dx}}{\mathrm{dt}}=\mathrm{Bv} l\) ( ∵ \mathrm{v}=\frac{\mathrm{dx}}{\mathrm{dt}}\(\))</p>
<p>Induced emf, e = \(\mathrm{c}=-\mathrm{d} \phi / \mathrm{d} \mathrm{l}=-\mathrm{vB}\left(\Rightarrow \frac{\mathrm{d} \phi^{\prime}}{\mathrm{dt}}=0\right)\)</p>
<p>For 2b x b</p>
<p>As = bb =&gt; c = 0</p>
<p>Forward journey,</p>
<p>For b &gt; x 0</p>
<p>c = -vbl,</p>
<p>For 2b x b.e= 0</p>
<p>Return journet,</p>
<p>For b &gt; x 0</p>
<p>e= vBl</p>
<p>For 2b x n2e=0</p>
<p>image</p>
<p>The post <a rel="nofollow" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-class-12-physics-chapter-6/">Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction</a> appeared first on <a rel="nofollow" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com">CBSE School Notes</a>.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
					<wfw:commentRss>https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-class-12-physics-chapter-6/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
			<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 14 Semiconductor Electronics</title>
		<link>https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-class-12-physics-chapter-14/</link>
					<comments>https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-class-12-physics-chapter-14/#respond</comments>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[Kristensmith Taylor]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Wed, 22 May 2024 04:49:34 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[Class 12 Physics]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://cbseschoolnotes.com/?p=4825</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[<p>CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 14  Semiconductor Electronics Multiple Choice Questions And Answers Question 1. Vm is the maximum voltage between the ends of the secondary terminal of a transformer used in a half-wave rectifier. When the PN junction diode is reverse-biased, what will be the potential difference between the two ends of the diode? ... <a title="Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 14 Semiconductor Electronics" class="read-more" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-class-12-physics-chapter-14/" aria-label="More on Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 14 Semiconductor Electronics">Read more</a></p>
<p>The post <a rel="nofollow" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-class-12-physics-chapter-14/">Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 14 Semiconductor Electronics</a> appeared first on <a rel="nofollow" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com">CBSE School Notes</a>.</p>
]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<h2>CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 14  Semiconductor Electronics Multiple Choice Questions And Answers</h2>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-6878" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Important-Questions-for-CBSE-Class-12-Physics-Chapter-14-Semiconductor-Electronics.png" alt="Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 14 Semiconductor Electronics" width="762" height="311" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Important-Questions-for-CBSE-Class-12-Physics-Chapter-14-Semiconductor-Electronics.png 762w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Important-Questions-for-CBSE-Class-12-Physics-Chapter-14-Semiconductor-Electronics-300x122.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 762px) 100vw, 762px" /></p>
<p><strong>Question 1. Vm is the maximum voltage between the ends of the secondary terminal of a transformer used in a half-wave rectifier. When the PN junction diode is reverse-biased, what will be the potential difference between the two ends of the diode?</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Zero</li>
<li>\(\frac{V_m}{\sqrt{2}}\)</li>
<li>V<sub>m</sub></li>
<li>2 V<sub>m</sub></li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 2. \(\frac{V_m}{\sqrt{2}}\)</p>
<p><strong>Read and Learn More<a href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics/"> Important Questions for Class 12 Physics with Answers</a></strong></p>
<p><strong>Question 2. The band gaps of an insulator, semiconductor, and conductor arc respectively Eg<sub>1</sub>, Eg<sub>2,</sub> and Eg<sub>3</sub> The relationship between them can be given as _______.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Eg<sub>1</sub> = Eg<sub>2</sub> = Eg<sub>3</sub></li>
<li>Eg<sub>1</sub> &lt; Eg<sub>2</sub> &lt; Eg<sub>3</sub></li>
<li>Eg<sub>1</sub> &gt; Eg<sub>2</sub> &gt; Eg<sub>3</sub></li>
<li>Eg<sub>1</sub> &lt; Eg<sub>2</sub> &gt; Eg<sub>3</sub></li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. Eg<sub>1</sub> &gt; Eg<sub>2</sub> &gt; Eg<sub>3</sub></p>
<p><strong>Question 3. A potential barrier of 0.2V exists across a pn junction. If the depletion region is 5.0 x 10<sup>-7</sup> m wide, then the intensity of the electric field in this region is ___ V/m</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>1 x 10<sup>5</sup></li>
<li>4 x 10<sup>5</sup></li>
<li>1 x 10<sup>6</sup></li>
<li>2 x 10<sup>5</sup></li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 2. 4 x 10<sup>5</sup></p>
<p><strong>Question 4. When will the conductivity of a Ge semiconductor decrease?</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>On adding acceptor impurity</li>
<li>On adding donor impurity</li>
<li>On making UV light incident</li>
<li>On decreasing the temperature</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. On decreasing the temperature</p>
<p><strong>Question 5. In an n-type semiconductor, which of the following statements is true:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Electrons are the majority carriers and tri-valent atoms are the dopants.</li>
<li>Electrons are the majority carriers and pentavalent atoms are the dopants.</li>
<li>Holes are minority carriers and pentavalent atoms are the dopants.</li>
<li>Holes are majority carriers and tri-valent atoms arc the dopants.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 2. Electrons arc majority carriers and pentavalent atoms are the dopants.</p>
<p><strong>Question 6. When a forward bias is applied to a p-n junction, it</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Raises the potential barrier</li>
<li>Reduces the majority carrier current to zero</li>
<li>Lowers the potential barrier</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. Lowers the potential barrier</p>
<p><strong>Question 7. In half-wave rectification, what is the output frequency if the input frequency is 50 Hz?</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>0</li>
<li>100 Hz</li>
<li>50 Hz</li>
<li>25 Hz</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. 50 Hz</p>
<p><strong>Question 8. _______ as an impurity, when added in Si or Gc P-type semiconductor is obtained.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Antimony</li>
<li>Arsenic</li>
<li>Phosphorus</li>
<li>Boron</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. Boron</p>
<p><strong>Question 9. In an intrinsic semiconductor, the density of free electrons is nc and the number density of holes is nh then</strong> ________.</p>
<ol>
<li>n<sub>c</sub> &gt;&gt; n<sub>h</sub></li>
<li>n<sub>c</sub> = 2n<sub>h</sub></li>
<li>n<sub>c</sub> = n<sub>h</sub></li>
<li>n<sub>c</sub> &lt;&lt; n<sub>h</sub></li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. n<sub>c</sub> = n<sub>h</sub></p>
<p><strong>Question 10. In an unbiased p-n junction, holes diffuse from the p-region to the n-region because,</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Free electrons in the n-region attract them</li>
<li>They move across the junction by the potential difference</li>
<li>Hole concentration in the p-region is higher as compared to the n-region</li>
<li>All the above</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. Hole concentration in the p-region is higher as compared to the n-region</p>
<h2>CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 14  Semiconductor Electronics Short Questions And Answers</h2>
<p><strong>Question 1.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>How does the energy gap of an intrinsic semiconductor change when doped with a trivalent impurity?</li>
<li>In a p-n junction under equilibrium, there is no net current. Why?</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Then some allowed energy levels are produced, situated in the energy gap slightly above the valence band, this arc is called acceptor energy levels. Due to this energy band gap decreases.</li>
<li>Net current (diffusion and drift current) is zero for both electrons and holes because the diffusion current is equal and opposite to the drift current for both carriers.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Question 2. Explain the formation of the barrier potential in a p-n junction.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>The loss of electrons from the n-region and the gain of electrons by the p-region causes a difference in potential across the junction of the two regions.</p>
<ul>
<li>The polarity of this potential is such as to oppose the further flow of earners so that a condition of equilibrium exists.</li>
<li>The p-n junction at equilibrium and the potential across the junction. The n-material has lost electrons, and the p-material has acquired electrons. The n-material is thus positive relative to the p-material.</li>
</ul>
<p>Since this potential tends to prevent the movement of electrons from the n region into the p region, it is often called a barrier potential.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4844" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Semiconductor-Electronics-Barrier-Potential-In-P-n-Junction.png" alt="Semiconductor Electronics Barrier Potential In P-n Junction" width="311" height="424" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Semiconductor-Electronics-Barrier-Potential-In-P-n-Junction.png 311w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Semiconductor-Electronics-Barrier-Potential-In-P-n-Junction-220x300.png 220w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 311px) 100vw, 311px" /></p>
<p><strong>Question 3.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Draw the circuit diagram of an illuminated photodiode and its I-V characteristics.</li>
<li>How can a photodiode be used to measure the light intensity?</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4845" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Semiconductor-Electronics-Photodiode.png" alt="Semiconductor Electronics Photodiode" width="615" height="301" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Semiconductor-Electronics-Photodiode.png 615w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Semiconductor-Electronics-Photodiode-300x147.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 615px) 100vw, 615px" /></p>
<p>2. The photocuring is directly proportional to the intensity of light this can be used for measuring the intensity of incident light.</p>
<p><strong>Question 4.</strong></p>
<p>1. In the following diagram, is the junction diode forward-biased or reverse-biased?</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4846" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Semiconductor-Electronics-Junction-Diode.png" alt="Semiconductor Electronics Junction Diode" width="462" height="155" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Semiconductor-Electronics-Junction-Diode.png 462w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Semiconductor-Electronics-Junction-Diode-300x101.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 462px) 100vw, 462px" /></p>
<p>2. Name two important processes that occur during the formation of a pn junction.</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>1. Reverse biased as the p-side is connected to the lower potential and the n-side to the higher potential.</p>
<p>Two important phenomena occur during the formation of the pn junction:</p>
<p>2. <strong>(1)</strong> <strong>Diffusion:</strong> Due to the concentration gradient the majority of charge carriers from the p side (holes) and the majority of charge carriers (electrons) on the n side start diffusing towards their opposite side.</p>
<p><strong>(2) Drift:</strong> As electron-hole pairs neutralize near the junction they leave behind immobile ions, these ions create an electric field from the n side to the p side due to which the minority charge carrier starts moving (drifting).</p>
<p><strong>Question 5. Draw the circuit diagram of a half-wave rectifier and explain its working.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p><strong>Working of half wave rectifier:</strong> The secondary coil of a transformer supplies the desired alternating voltage across terminals A and B. When the voltage at A is in a positive cycle, the diode is in forward bias and it conducts current.</p>
<p>When A is at a negative cycle, the diode is in reverse bias and it does not conduct current only in the positive half-cycle of alternative current (ac), there is a current through the load resistor R<sub>L</sub>, and we gel output voltage.</p>
<p>Thus, We get a half-wave rectified output. So this circuit is called a half-wave rectifier.</p>
<p><strong>Circuit Diagram:</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4847" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Semiconductor-Electronics-Half-Wave-Rectifier-Circuit.png" alt="Semiconductor Electronics Half Wave Rectifier Circuit" width="618" height="260" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Semiconductor-Electronics-Half-Wave-Rectifier-Circuit.png 618w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Semiconductor-Electronics-Half-Wave-Rectifier-Circuit-300x126.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 618px) 100vw, 618px" /></p>
<p><strong>Graphy:</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4848" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Semiconductor-Electronics-Half-Wave-Rectifier-Graph.png" alt="Semiconductor Electronics Half Wave Rectifier Graph" width="516" height="345" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Semiconductor-Electronics-Half-Wave-Rectifier-Graph.png 516w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Semiconductor-Electronics-Half-Wave-Rectifier-Graph-300x201.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 516px) 100vw, 516px" /></p>
<p><strong>Question 6. Draw the circuit diagram of a full wave rectifier along with the input and output waveforms. Briefly explain how the output voltage/current is unidirectional.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p><strong>Working:</strong> When the positive half cycle of input a.c. signal flows through the primary coil, induced emf is set up in the secondary coil due to mutual induction. The direction of induced emf is such that the upper end of the secondary coil becomes positive while the lower end becomes negative.</p>
<ul>
<li>Thus, diode D<sub>1</sub> is forward biased and diode D<sub>2</sub> is reverse biased, so the current due to diode D<sub>1</sub> flows through the circuit. The output voltage which varies per the input half cycle is obtained across the load resistance (R<sub>L</sub>).</li>
<li>During the negative half cycle of input a.c. signal, diode D<sub>1</sub> is reverse biased and diode D<sub>2</sub> is forward biased. The current due to diode D<sub>2</sub> flows through the circuit. The output voltage is obtained across the load resistance (RL ). The input and corresponding output voltage are predicted.</li>
</ul>
<p>Since both the halves of input a.c. (wave) arc rectified, so the junction diode is called a full wave rectifier.</p>
<p><strong>Circuit Diagram:</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4849" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Semiconductor-Electronics-Full-Wave-Rectifier-Circuit.png" alt="Semiconductor Electronics Full Wave Rectifier Circuit" width="544" height="330" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Semiconductor-Electronics-Full-Wave-Rectifier-Circuit.png 544w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Semiconductor-Electronics-Full-Wave-Rectifier-Circuit-300x182.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 544px) 100vw, 544px" /></p>
<p><strong>Graph:</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4850" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Semiconductor-Electronics-Full-Wave-Rectifier-Graph.png" alt="Semiconductor Electronics Full Wave Rectifier Graph" width="484" height="376" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Semiconductor-Electronics-Full-Wave-Rectifier-Graph.png 484w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Semiconductor-Electronics-Full-Wave-Rectifier-Graph-300x233.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 484px) 100vw, 484px" /></p>
<p><strong>Question 7. Distinguish between a conductor and a semi-conductor based on the energy band diagram.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4852" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Semiconductor-Electronics-Conductor-On-The-Basis-Of-Energy-Band.png" alt="Semiconductor Electronics Conductor On The Basis Of Energy Band" width="752" height="307" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Semiconductor-Electronics-Conductor-On-The-Basis-Of-Energy-Band.png 752w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Semiconductor-Electronics-Conductor-On-The-Basis-Of-Energy-Band-300x122.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 752px) 100vw, 752px" /></p>
<p>[E<sub>g</sub> = Forbidden Energy gap]</p>
<p><strong>Question 8. Show on a plot, the variation of resistivity of</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>A conductor, and</li>
<li>A typical semiconductor as a function of temperature.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Using the expression for the resistivity in terms of number density and relaxation time between the collisions, explain how resistivity in the case of a conductor increases while it decreases in a semiconductor, with the rise of temperature.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>Variation of resistivity With Temperature</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4853" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Semiconductor-Electronics-Variation-Of-Resistivity-With-Temperature.png" alt="Semiconductor Electronics Variation Of Resistivity With Temperature" width="564" height="285" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Semiconductor-Electronics-Variation-Of-Resistivity-With-Temperature.png 564w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Semiconductor-Electronics-Variation-Of-Resistivity-With-Temperature-300x152.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 564px) 100vw, 564px" /></p>
<p>The resistivity of a material is given by</p>
<p>∴ \(\rho=\frac{m}{n e^2 \tau}\)</p>
<p>n ⇒ Number density</p>
<p>τ ⇒ Relaxation time</p>
<p>On increasing the temperature of the conductor relaxation time decreases while the number density remains constant. Due to this resistivity of the conductor increases.</p>
<p>In the case of semiconductors, on increasing the temperature relaxation time decreases but the number density increases. An increase in the number density is more effective than a decrease in the relaxation time. That&#8217;s why the resistivity of semiconductors decreases.</p>
<p><strong>Question 9. Explain with the help of a diagram the formation of depletion region and barrier potential in a p-n junction.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>It is clear that the N-type semiconductor has a P-TYPC excess of free electrons and the P-type has an excess of holes therefore joined through a special process, electrons migrate towards the P-side and holes migrate towards the N-side due to concentration gradient.</p>
<p>The departure of an electron from the N-side to the P-side leaves a positive donor ion on the N-side and likewise hole leaves a negative acceptor ion on the P-side resulting in the formation of a depletion layer having widths 10<sup>-7</sup>m.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4854" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Semiconductor-Electronics-Depletion-Region-And-Barrier-Potential-In-A-P-n-Junction.png" alt="Semiconductor Electronics Depletion Region And Barrier Potential In A P-n Junction" width="483" height="368" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Semiconductor-Electronics-Depletion-Region-And-Barrier-Potential-In-A-P-n-Junction.png 483w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Semiconductor-Electronics-Depletion-Region-And-Barrier-Potential-In-A-P-n-Junction-300x229.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 483px) 100vw, 483px" /></p>
<p><strong>Depletion layer:</strong> It is the layer near the junction in which electrons arc absent on the n side and holes are absent on the p side.</p>
<p><strong>Potential barrier:</strong> Due to the accumulation of immobile ions near the junction an electric potential difference (V<sub>b</sub>) develops between the n side and the p side which acts as a barrier for further diffusion of electrons and holes.</p>
<p>V<sub>b</sub> = E<sub>i</sub> x d (volt)</p>
<p><strong>Question 10. Draw the energy band diagrams for conductors, semiconductors, and insulators. Which band determines the electrical conductivity of a solid? How is the electrical conductivity of a semiconductor affected by the rise in its temperature? Explain.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p><strong>Energy Band Diagram:</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4851" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Semiconductor-Electronics-Energy-Band.png" alt="Semiconductor Electronics Energy Band" width="728" height="259" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Semiconductor-Electronics-Energy-Band.png 728w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Semiconductor-Electronics-Energy-Band-300x107.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 728px) 100vw, 728px" /></p>
<p>The conduction band determines the electrical conductivity of the solid.</p>
<p>On increasing the temperature of semiconductor electrical conductivity increases. When we increase the temperature, some of the covalent bonds get broken and e-hole pairs are generated.</p>
<h2>CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 14  Semiconductor Electronics Long Questions And Answers</h2>
<p><strong>Question 1.</strong> Consider a thin p-type silicon (p-Si) semiconductor wafer. By adding precisely a small quantity of pentavalent impurity, part of the p-Si wafer can be converted into n-Si. There are several processes by which a semiconductor can be formed.</p>
<p>The wafer now contains p-region and nregion and a metallurgical junction between p-, and n- region. Two important processes occur during the formation of a p-n junction: diffusion and drift.</p>
<p>We know that in an n-type semiconductor, the concentration of electrons (number of electrons per unit volume) is more compared to the concentration of holes. Similarly, in a p-type semiconductor, the concentration of holes is more than the concentration of electrons.</p>
<p>During the formation of the p-n junction, and due to the concentration gradient across p-, and n- sides, holes diffuse from p- side to n-sidc (p → n) and electrons diffuse from n-sidc to p-sidc (n → p). This motion of charge carriers gives rise to diffusion current across the junction.</p>
<p>(1). <strong>How can a p-type semiconductor be converted into an n-type semiconductor?</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Adding pentavalent impurity</li>
<li>Adding trivalent impurity</li>
<li>Not possible</li>
<li>Heavy doping</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. Adding pentavalent impurity</p>
<p>(2). <strong>Which of the following is true about n-type semiconductors?</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>The concentration of electrons is less than that of holes.</li>
<li>The concentration of electrons is more than that of holes.</li>
<li>The concentration of electrons is equal to that of holes.</li>
<li>None of the above.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 2. Concentration of electrons is more than that of holes.</p>
<p>(3). <strong>Which of the following is the reason for diffusion current?</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Diffusion of holes from p to n</li>
<li>Diffusion of electrons from n to p</li>
<li>Both (1) and (2)</li>
<li>None of these</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. Both (1) and (2)</p>
<p>(4). <strong>What are the processes that occur during the formation of a p-n junction?</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Drift</li>
<li>Diffusion</li>
<li>Both (1) and (2)</li>
<li>None of these</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. Both (1) and (2)</p>
<p>The post <a rel="nofollow" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-class-12-physics-chapter-14/">Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 14 Semiconductor Electronics</a> appeared first on <a rel="nofollow" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com">CBSE School Notes</a>.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
					<wfw:commentRss>https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-class-12-physics-chapter-14/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
			<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 13 Nuclei</title>
		<link>https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-class-12-physics-chapter-13/</link>
					<comments>https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-class-12-physics-chapter-13/#respond</comments>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[Kristensmith Taylor]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Wed, 22 May 2024 04:47:31 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[Class 12 Physics]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://cbseschoolnotes.com/?p=4773</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[<p>CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 13 Nuclei Multiple Choice Questions And Answers Question 1. If the radii abd nucleus are R1 and R2 respectively, Then = ________. Answer: 2. Read and Learn More Important Questions for Class 12 Physics with Answers ⇒ ∴ Question 2. In the radioactive transformation which are the successively emitted radioactive ... <a title="Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 13 Nuclei" class="read-more" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-class-12-physics-chapter-13/" aria-label="More on Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 13 Nuclei">Read more</a></p>
<p>The post <a rel="nofollow" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-class-12-physics-chapter-13/">Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 13 Nuclei</a> appeared first on <a rel="nofollow" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com">CBSE School Notes</a>.</p>
]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<h2>CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 13 Nuclei Multiple Choice Questions And Answers</h2>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-6869" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Important-Questions-for-CBSE-Class-12-Physics-Chapter-13-Nuclei.png" alt="Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 13 Nuclei" width="745" height="415" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Important-Questions-for-CBSE-Class-12-Physics-Chapter-13-Nuclei.png 745w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Important-Questions-for-CBSE-Class-12-Physics-Chapter-13-Nuclei-300x167.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 745px) 100vw, 745px" /></p>
<p><strong>Question 1. If the radii \({ }_{13}^{27} \mathrm{Zn}\) abd \({ }_{30}^{64} \mathrm{Zn}\) nucleus are R1 and R2 respectively, Then \(\frac{R_1}{R_2}\) = ________.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>\(\frac{27}{64}\)</li>
<li>\(\frac{3}{4}\)</li>
<li>\(\frac{9}{16}\)</li>
<li>\(\frac{13}{30}\)</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 2. \(\frac{3}{4}\)</p>
<p><strong>Read and Learn More<a href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-for-cbse-class-12-physics/"> Important Questions for Class 12 Physics with Answers</a></strong></p>
<p>⇒ \(R=R_0 A^{\frac{1}{3}}\)</p>
<p>∴ \(\frac{R_1}{R_2}=\left(\frac{A_1}{A_2}\right)^{1 / 3}=\left(\frac{27}{64}\right)^{1 / 3}=\frac{3}{4}\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 2. In the radioactive transformation \({ }_z^A X \rightarrow{ }_{Z-1}^A X_1 \rightarrow{ }_{Z-1}^{A-4} X_2 \rightarrow_Z^{A-4} X_3\) which are the successively emitted radioactive radiations?</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>β<sup>&#8211;</sup>, α, β<sup>&#8211;</sup></li>
<li>α, β<sup>&#8211;</sup>, β<sup>&#8211;</sup></li>
<li>β<sup>&#8211;</sup>, β<sup>&#8211;</sup>, α</li>
<li>α, α, β<sup>&#8211;</sup></li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. β<sup>&#8211;</sup>, α, β<sup>&#8211;</sup></p>
<p><strong>Question 3. Which are the isotone, isobar and isotope nuclei respectively of \({ }_6^{12} \mathrm{C}\) from among \({ }_6^{14} \mathrm{C},{ }_5^{12} \mathrm{~B},{ }_7^{13} \mathrm{~N}\)?</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>\({ }_5^{12} \text { B, }{ }_6^{14} \mathrm{C,} { }_7^{13} \mathrm{~N}\)</li>
<li>\({ }_6^{14} \mathrm{C},{ }_7^{13} \mathrm{~N},{ }_5^{12} \mathrm{~B}\)</li>
<li>\({ }_7^{13} \text { N, }{ }_5^{12} \mathrm{B,} { }_6^{14} \mathrm{~C}\)</li>
<li>\({ }_6^{14} \mathrm{C},{ }_5^{12} \mathrm{~B,} { }_7^{13} \mathrm{~N}\)</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. \({ }_7^{13} \text { N, }{ }_5^{12} \mathrm{B,} { }_6^{14} \mathrm{~C}\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 4. The binding energy per nucleon is almost constant for the nuclei having atomic mass number ________.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>30 &lt; A &lt; 240</li>
<li>30 &lt; A &lt; 170</li>
<li>170 &lt; A &lt; 230</li>
<li>156 &lt; A &lt; 192</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 2. 30 &lt; A &lt; 170</p>
<p><strong>Question 5. The energy equivalent to 1 gram (g) substance is _________ J.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>9 x 10<sup>7</sup></li>
<li>9 x 10<sup>10</sup></li>
<li>9 x 10<sup>13</sup></li>
<li>9 x 10<sup>8</sup></li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. 9 x 10<sup>13</sup></p>
<p>∴ \(E=m c^2=\frac{1}{1000} \times 9 \times 10^{16}=9 \times 10^{13} \mathrm{~J}\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 6. \({ }_{80}^{198} \mathrm{Hg} \text { and }{ }_{79}^{197} \mathrm{Au}\) are example of __________.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Isotopes</li>
<li>Isomers</li>
<li>Isobars</li>
<li>Isotones</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. Isotones</p>
<p><strong>Question 7. In a curve of binding energy per nucleon versus mass number (A), the maximum value of Ebn is 8.75 MeV/nucleon the value of a corresponding atomic mass number is _______.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>56</li>
<li>235</li>
<li>238</li>
<li>171</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. 56</p>
<p><strong>Question 8. The saturation property of the nuclear forces is because they are:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Charge independent forces</li>
<li>Non-central forces</li>
<li>Spin-dependent forces</li>
<li>Short-range forces</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer: </strong>4. Short-range forces</p>
<h2>CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 13 Nuclei Assertion And Reason</h2>
<p>For question numbers 1 to 5 two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct answer to these questions from the codes (1), (2), (3), and (4) as given below.</p>
<ol>
<li>Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A</li>
<li>Both A and R are true but R is NOT the collected explanation of A</li>
<li>A is true but R is false</li>
<li>A is false and R is also false</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Question 1. Assertion:</strong> Energy is released in nuclear fission.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> The total binding energy of the fission fragments is larger than the total binding energy of the parent.</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A</p>
<p><strong>Question 2. Assertion:</strong> The nucleus may emit negatively charged particles.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> The nucleus contains a negative charge also.</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. A is true but R is false</p>
<p><strong>Question 3. Assertion: Nuclear binding energy per nucleon is in the order \({ }_4^9 \mathrm{Be}&gt;{ }_3^7 \mathrm{Li}&gt;{ }_2^4 \mathrm{He}\)</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Reason: Binding energy per nucleon increases linearly with differences in several neutrons and protons.</li>
<li>Answer: 4. A is false and R is also false</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Question 4. Assertion:</strong> Isobars arc the clement having the same mass number but a different atomic number.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> Neutrons and protons are present inside the nucleus.</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 2. Both A and R are true but R is NOT the collected explanation of A</p>
<p><strong>Question 5. Assertion:</strong> The density of all the nuclei is the same.</p>
<p><strong>Reason:</strong> The radius of the nucleus is directly proportional to the cube roots of the mass number</p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 1. Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A</p>
<h2>CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 13 Nuclei Short Questions And Answers</h2>
<p><strong>Question 1. Obtain approximately the ratio of the nuclear radii of the gold isotope \({ }_{79} \mathrm{Au}^{197}\) and silver isotopes \({ }_{47} \mathrm{Ag}^{107}\)</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>A<sub>1</sub> = 197 and A<sub>2</sub> = 107 R = R<sub>0</sub>A<sup>1/3</sup></p>
<p>⇒ \(\frac{R_1}{R_2}=\left[\frac{A_1}{A_2}\right]^{1 / 3}=\left[\frac{197}{107}\right]^{1 / 3}=1.225\)</p>
<p><strong>Question 2. The relation R = R<sub>0</sub> A<sup>1/3</sup>. where R<sub>0</sub> is a constant and A is the mass number of A nucleus, showing that the nuclear matter density is nearly constant. (i.e independent of A)</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>Density of nucleus matter = \(\frac{\text { Mass of nucleus }}{\text { Volume of nucleus }}\)</p>
<p>⇒ \(\rho=\frac{\mathrm{mA}}{\frac{4}{3} \pi \mathrm{R}^3}\) [R = R A1/3]</p>
<p>⇒  \(\rho=\frac{3 \mathrm{~m}}{4 \pi \mathrm{R}_0^3}\) = \(\rho=\frac{\mathrm{A} \times 1.66 \times 10^{27} \mathrm{~kg}}{\frac{4}{3} \times 3.14 \times\left(1.2 \times 10^{-15}\right)^3 \mathrm{~A}} \approx 10^{17} \mathrm{~kg} / \mathrm{m}^3\)</p>
<p>The density of the nucleus is constant.</p>
<p><strong>Question 3. Draw a graph showing the variation of the potential energy of a pair of nucleons as a function of their separation to indicate the region in which the nuclear force is </strong><strong>(1) Attractive, (2)</strong><strong>Repulsive</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4793" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Nuclei-Variation-Of-Potential-Energy-Of-A-Pair-Of-Nucleon.png" alt="Nuclei Variation Of Potential Energy Of A Pair Of Nucleon" width="316" height="337" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Nuclei-Variation-Of-Potential-Energy-Of-A-Pair-Of-Nucleon.png 316w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Nuclei-Variation-Of-Potential-Energy-Of-A-Pair-Of-Nucleon-281x300.png 281w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 316px) 100vw, 316px" /></p>
<p>The potential energy is minimum at a distance r() of about 0.8 fm. This means that the force is attractive for distances larger than 0.8 fm and repulsive if they are separated by distances less than 0.8 fm.</p>
<p><strong>Question 4. What is nuclear force? Write its specific properties.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p><strong>Nuclear Force:</strong> The nuclear force is the strongest force of nature that holds nucleons in the nucleus of an atom.</p>
<p><strong>Properties: </strong>Nuclear forces act between a pair of neutrons, a pair of protons, and a neutron-proton pair with the same strength, i.e. nuclear force is charge-independent.</p>
<ol>
<li>The nuclear forces are very short-range forces, hence show saturation property.</li>
<li>The nuclear forces are dependent on the spin angular momentum of nucleons.</li>
<li>Nuclear forces arc non-central forces.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Question 5. Differentiate between nuclear fission and fusion. Give an example of each. Which of the above reactions take place in a nuclear reactor?</strong></p>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>1. <strong>Nuclear Fission:</strong> Nuclear fission is the phenomenon of splitting a heavy nucleus (usually A &gt; 230) into two or more lighter nuclei.</p>
<p><strong>Example:</strong> \({ }_{92} \mathrm{U}^{235}+{ }_0 \mathrm{n}^1 \rightarrow_{92} \mathrm{U}^{236} \rightarrow_{56} \mathrm{Ba}^{141}+{ }_{36} \mathrm{Kr}^{92}+3 { }_0\mathrm{n}^1+\mathrm{Q}\)</p>
<p>2. <strong>Nuclear Fission:</strong> The process of combining of two lighter nuclei to form one heavy<br />
nucleus is called nuclear fusion.</p>
<p><strong>Example:</strong> \(4_1 \mathrm{H}^1 \rightarrow{ }_2 \mathrm{He}^4+2_1 \mathrm{e}^0+2 v+26.7 \mathrm{MeV}\)</p>
<p>A nuclear reactor is based on a controlled chain reaction.</p>
<p><strong>Question 5.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Explain the processes of nuclear fission and fusion using the plot of binding energy per nucleon (BE/A) versus the mass number A.</li>
<li>Why are neutrons preferred as better projectiles in causing nuclear reactions?</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>1. The value of binding energy per nucleon gives a measure of the stability of that nucleus greater the binding energy per nucleon of a nucleus, the more stable the nucleus.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4795" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Nuclei-Binding-Energy-Per-Nucleon.png" alt="Nuclei Binding Energy Per Nucleon" width="516" height="352" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Nuclei-Binding-Energy-Per-Nucleon.png 516w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Nuclei-Binding-Energy-Per-Nucleon-300x205.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 516px) 100vw, 516px" /></p>
<p>The above graph shows, the binding energy per nucleon drawn against mass number A. The saturation effect of nuclear forces is properly responsible for the approximate constancy of binding energy in the range 30 &lt; A &lt; 170.</p>
<p>It is clear from the curve that the binding energy per nucleon of the fused nuclei is more than that of the lighter nuclei taking part in nuclear fusion. Hence energy is released in this process.</p>
<p>In nuclear fission, the sum of the masses of the final products is less than the sum of the masses of the reactant components. Hence energy is released in this process.</p>
<p>2. These are uncharged particle</p>
<p><strong>Question 6. </strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Write the basic nuclear process involved in the emission of β<sup>+</sup> in a symbolic form, by a radioactive nucleus.</li>
<li>In the reactions given below:
<ol>
<li>\({ }_6^{11} \mathrm{C} \rightarrow{ }_y^{z} \mathrm{B}+x+v\)</li>
<li>\({ }_6^{12} \mathrm{C}+{ }_6^{12} \mathrm{C} \rightarrow{ }_{\mathrm{a}}^{20} \mathrm{Ne}+{ }_1^{\mathrm{c}} \mathrm{He}\)</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong></p>
<p>1. \({ }_z X^{A} \rightarrow{\beta^+}{ }_{z-1} Y^{A}+{ }_{+1} e^{0}+v+\text { energy }\)</p>
<p>In the emission of β<sup>+</sup>, mass no. (A) remains the same but atomic no. (Z) decreases by 1 unit.</p>
<p>2. (1). \(x \longrightarrow{ }_{+1} e^0, y \longrightarrow 5, z \longrightarrow 11\)</p>
<p>(2). \(\mathrm{a} \longrightarrow 10, \mathrm{~b} \longrightarrow 2, \mathrm{c} \longrightarrow 4\)</p>
<h2>CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 13 Nuclei Long Questions And Answers</h2>
<p><strong>Question 1. When the nucleus of an atom splits into lighter nuclei through a nuclear reaction the process is termed as nuclear fission. This decay can be natural spontaneous splitting by radioactive decay or can be simulated in a lab by achieving the necessary conditions (bombarding with neutrons). The resulting fragments tend to have a combined mass that is less than the original.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-4797" src="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Nuclei-The-Nucleus-Of-An-Atom-Splits-Into-Lighter-Nuclei.png" alt="Nuclei The Nucleus Of An Atom Splits Into Lighter Nuclei" width="443" height="272" srcset="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Nuclei-The-Nucleus-Of-An-Atom-Splits-Into-Lighter-Nuclei.png 443w, https://cbseschoolnotes.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/Nuclei-The-Nucleus-Of-An-Atom-Splits-Into-Lighter-Nuclei-300x184.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 443px) 100vw, 443px" /></p>
<p>(1). <strong>This splitting of a nucleus into smaller nuclei is:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Fusion</li>
<li>Fission</li>
<li>Half-life</li>
<li>Gamma-radiation</li>
</ol>
<p>Answer: 2. Fission</p>
<p>(2). <strong>Name the moderator used in the nuclear reactor.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Plutonium</li>
<li>Thorium</li>
<li>Graphite</li>
<li>Berilium</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. Graphite</p>
<p>(3). <strong>Which isotope of Uranium can sustain the chain reaction?</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>U-230</li>
<li>U-235</li>
<li>U-245</li>
<li>U-225</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer</strong>: 2.U-235</p>
<p><strong>(4). Which of the following atomic particles has the least mass?</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Proton</li>
<li>Electron</li>
<li>Deuleron</li>
<li>Neutron</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 2. Electron</p>
<p>Question 2. Uranium-235 (<sup>235</sup>U) is an isotope of uranium making up about 0.72 % of natural uranium. It is a fissile material i.c., and it can sustain a fission chain reaction. U-235 has a half-life of 703.8 million years. The main use for uranium today is for fuel in nuclear power plants. Depleted uranium is used in bullets and larger projectiles to make them hard and dense enough to reach through armored targets. Inhaling large concentrations of this radioactive element can cause lung cancer. It is also a toxic chemical, its ingestion can cause damage to kidneys, and its radioactive properties could cause cancers of bones or liver.</p>
<p>(1).<strong> A nuclei having the same number of neutrons but a different number of protons/atomic numbers and called:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Isobars</li>
<li>Isomers</li>
<li>Isotones</li>
<li>Isotopes</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 3. Isotones</p>
<p>(2). <strong>For a nuclear fission process, suitable nuclei are:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Any nuclei</li>
<li>Heavy nuclei</li>
<li>Lighter nuclei</li>
<li>Nuclei lying in the middle of the periodic table</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 2. Heavy nuclei</p>
<p><strong>(3). Mass-energy equation was propounded by:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Newton</li>
<li>Madam Curie</li>
<li>C.V. Raman</li>
<li>Einstein</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Answer:</strong> 4. Einstein</p>
<p>(4). <strong>Name the antiparticle of electron:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Positro</li>
<li>α-Particle</li>
<li>proton</li>
<li>β- Particle</li>
</ol>
<p>Answer: 1. Positro</p>
<p>The post <a rel="nofollow" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-class-12-physics-chapter-13/">Important Questions for CBSE Class 12 Physics Chapter 13 Nuclei</a> appeared first on <a rel="nofollow" href="https://cbseschoolnotes.com">CBSE School Notes</a>.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
					<wfw:commentRss>https://cbseschoolnotes.com/important-questions-class-12-physics-chapter-13/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
			<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		
		
			</item>
	</channel>
</rss>

<!--
Performance optimized by W3 Total Cache. Learn more: https://www.boldgrid.com/w3-total-cache/?utm_source=w3tc&utm_medium=footer_comment&utm_campaign=free_plugin

Page Caching using Disk: Enhanced 

Served from: cbseschoolnotes.com @ 2026-05-07 10:27:21 by W3 Total Cache
-->